Home

Xerox ColorQube 9303_U multifunctional

1. characterscanbeentered oyo Ee e To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 4 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The e mail address entered is displayed in the From field Subject To enter a subject for the internet fax 1 Select the Su bject field poemek Advanced Internet Fax ES Layout Job Settings Adjustment Options Assembly 2 Using the keyboard enter the subject k of the Internet Fax Ge S gt ec EH E a Les back arrow key or to clear the CC entire entry select Clear Text access additional language KE Ke nnn amp Text keyboards Address Book 3 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The subject entered is displayed in the Subject field 98 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Address Book Internet Fax If the device has been setup to access the Network and Public Address Books you can use them to select recipients For information about setting up address books refer to the System Administrator Guide 1 Select the Address Book button A list of e mail addresses is displayed Select the e mail address required and select Add To or Add Cc from the drop down menu The e mail address is added to the recipien
2. image file set a Reply To address and add 7 Gas 000000 0 brief message The Acknowledgement fall ie gr Report can also be enabled To access the Internet Fax Options select Services SE Home and Internet Fax Then select the Internet Fax Options tab File Format File Format determines the type of file created You can select the file format you wish to use for your scanned image The POF Options Eon Portable Document Format pdf options are e Multi Page TIFF e Image Only Best suited for Sharing and printing S ocuments e Multi Page TIFF Tagged Image File 0 Format produces a single TIFF file pring ony The resuting fe cannot be containing several pages of scanned images A more specialized software is required to open this type of file format e PDF Portable Document Format allows recipients with the right software to view print or edit the Internet Fax file no matter what their computer platform Depending on the receiving device the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi This file format is optimised for viewing and sharing File Format e PDF A Portable Document Format is an industry standard format for long term document preservation based on the PDF format The Advanced Settings may need checking to ensure they are appropriate for extended use 106 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Internet Fax Options Message
3. j 2 j ance ave Defaults programing feature within the Embedded Eet Sh Fax service Fax Image Quality Kh aries e Select the default required for each Gees e Off feature in each of the programing E Fax Country Setting Use this option to select the country the device is located in Line 1 Setup The standard fax option supports one tabs Select Save Defaults The settings selected become the default settings for each fax job 2 Sided Scanning Original Type A confirmation screen is displayed sided Text Fine 200 dpi select Done to return to the previous screen 2 lt Country Setup Country Selection Select the Country required from the options shown Select your country location Q V analogue telephone line If the Extended S SAAS Ee Fax option is installed the device can Options support two analogue telephone lines This sens and receive option enables you to set up Line 1 DN bases Fax Number is the number of the e ege phone line your system is attached to Enter the number for Line 1 using the numeric keypad Line Name is a friendly name to logically identify the system Enter the name using the keyboard provided Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character or use Delete Text to delete the entire entry Select Save Options determine whether the line is able to Send and Receive Send Only or Receive Only Select the required option for the fax line ColorQube 930
4. exam ple If the IP Address iS EI inden dhtml 192 168 100 100 enter the following ce a a XEROX ColorQube 9303 into the URL field aam Sa eS ee http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions Select Scan and select Mailboxes from the display options Select your private folder enter the folder password and select OK ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 1 Workflow Scanning Scan to Mailbox A list of the folder contents is displayed If necessary use the Update View option to update the list of contents 12 Select the file required The following options are available e Download is used to save a copy of the file to a specified location If Download is selected you will need to select Save and specify a file location e Reprint can be used to print the file on the device The job is sent to the device immediately and printed e Delete is used to permanently remove the file from your private folder and from the device e Job Log is used to view the job log information for the selected job Select the action required from the drop down menu and select Go 172 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Scan to Home Scan
5. 25 Er eee 26 OUTDUR FONNO 2 see os de ieee ante ee EE es 2 BOOKE GCC E E E E E EEE EEEE E EEEE 27 0 0 00070 29 ITI a A E E T A E E E EEEE EEES 34 Transparency 5 geleet CN 39 Weieren 39 leie BE e e TEEN 42 DUNG SOO WEE 42 5 dee AERIENE 3 Sie EIN EE 44 Retrieve Saved Settings ennnen rrr o nnr ersroe rrer rorrrrserrren 45 LOG OUT EE 46 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 Copy Introduction Introduction This guide describes the copying features of the device including options for Output Color Reduce Enlarge 2 Sided Copying Layout Adjustment Image Quality Output Format Job Assembly and other copy functions Copy is a standard feature and is selected by pressing the Services Home button then the Copy option When Copy is selected the device scans Print From your originals and stores the images It then prints the images based on the selections made Most feature screens include these buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen Instructions for making a copy and using the basic features are provided in the ColorQube 9301 9302
6. e e e nrn rrrrrrrnrnnoo onoono rrnnnnnnnn 106 JOD A eO EEN 109 D TIE 110 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 3 Contents Fax from DC 111 IEE OCU e e a WEE 114 POT 115 0 SEENEN EREET 117 PRL E E 123 ag geet 58 126 0 0000000 20 128 gie ee ele EE 134 EE eege 137 WY GUL e de Le e 139 PW NN Sha cnt on e E E S E dee 143 Workflow ENEE 145 MALT OGUCTION eeraa 65 sae ees one sees E ee eeenes 148 Workflow Scanning Options 0 ccc cee cee eee eee 150 Advanced Ee ln a i 000000000 000 050 0050000 ee 153 156 FING ODUONS 5340505 02 0400000 159 leien Te 162 Creating Templates ee re 163 SCO COMICON EE 169 SCOM LO E E EERE ARER E 173 Beie Bluff OU eren a EE A ee ee ee ee eee ee er ee 176 0 TTET 177 EE ee E E EE E asses 180 Sne UR lee e 8 181 Advanced Settings 2 22 EREET ERRE EREE 186 Layout 2 00 189 Se UR een EE 192 VOD FSSC ET 195 196 EE 197 EEE 200 Usma 2 0200000 0002200000 201 Saving Jobs for use with Print From 203 LOG TO OU 5 eee aar E A cavacs sees sens eseeseswen sete ss eeeeerenewee 207 LEE EELER REES 209 Uer de BEE 212 O OD e 900 eee e sand 213 4 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Contents Print from USR 214 Kels E ee errr re 215 2h EE 217 tg reel Oe WEE
7. El EE 271 Paper Management 274 TOT E E E A A E RE REE AR 276 hue EE 278 S T EE 279 280 02 cie OUICK Setup HOME ege EE 7 282 Display Brightness 283 en eeees 283 Configuration Information Pages ccc ccc eee ene ennes 284 Reset UI to Factory Settings 0 ccc Interrupt Printing Enablement 284 DEVICE d Lui EE 285 COPY Service SeLUNGS uc0cccupcautoeuaudscetecegGece bent deuseeseseseeeseneseeeseuen 285 Embedded Fax SCULINGS EEN 288 dE Ee 295 ee EE 295 NetWork SCUUINGS EE 296 Online OFfliNne 296 206 0 secede ek Advanced Settings EE 296 NetWork Ee 2 0 296 oe eee aes seee seo EELER 296 JSD Accounting Settings e e e e rnnr nn rrnnrnnrrrroor nn oorr r nnnrnnnn 297 PCCOUMEIMG EE 297 298 0 COPY ACLIVILY REDOM GRI T e gl CTT 299 AUCRONZOLION ee EE er 299 299 Image Overwrite IT SOG naa see eee eee E EE E eg 300 300 301 Eye saute eee ann 7 777 R EAS 301 SUDDOIE PAGES 2 E E a a E E a e T 301 OUOU EE 301 FIX 302 5 00 0 0 INGOWOUK EE 303 eeh 303 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 Administration and Accounting Tools Tools The settings on the device can be setup using via two options Internet Services or Tools This guide explains the op
8. LEF and 11x17 SEF Other combinations are shown on the screen The device detects the size of the documents and can produce the following output e If Auto Reduce Enlarge and a specific Paper Supply is selected all the images are reduced or 5 Original Size La Kai Auto Detect Proset Scan Areas Custom Scan Area Mixed Size Originals You are specifying the area that will be ey Original size Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custam E Scan area You are specifying the Mixed Sige area that will be Originals scanned Original Size The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed in the feeder and processed at the same time ia Custom Soon Area Frese Scan Areas enlarged and copied onto the same size paper e If Auto Paper Supply is selected the images are copied size for size and a mix of paper sizes will be output ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy 23 Layout Adjustment Book Copying A CAUTION Do Not close the document feeder when scanning bound originals This feature enables you to specify which page or pages of a book are to be scanned The book original is placed face down on the document glass with the spine of the book lined up with the marker on the rear edge of the glass Align the top of the bound original against the rear edge of the document glass The device will identify the size of the original during scanning If
9. or use Internet Services to create a brand new one or modify an existing one To successfully complete a Workflow Scanning job you must select a template from the device touch screen Template operations can either be performed using Internet Services or FreeFlow SMARTsend For information about FreeFlow SMARTsend templates refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend User Guide This guide is included with the FreeFlow software documentation that accompanied your device Always present on the device at the top of the list is the Default template The Default template is supplied with your device software Once your System Administrator has setup the file repository they define the parameters of the Default template As a user you can create a new template delete an existing template or copy and then modify an existing template These template operations are performed using Internet Services More information on these operations is given later in this guide ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 149 Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Options Workflow Scanning Options Selecting a Template To use a template select the template im ie Zit Scanning tment Options Assembly required from the template list To access Tae additional templates use the drop down DOG Pre programmed menu above the list To ensure the latest templates are available select Update Templates from the Advanced Settings tab
10. 4 Special doc A Held Pay For Print gt The Status is updated as the jobs are processed and printed The following Status information can be shown e Printing the device is currently printing the job e Scheduling the job has been converted into the appropriate format and is being schedule to print e Pending the job has been scanned but is awaiting the resources to be formatted e Paused the active job was paused The pause can be initiated using the Stop button on the control panel by selecting Pause from the print queue screen on your computer or due to a system fault during the running of the job The job is not deleted from the list and can be resumed e Interrupted the job was interrupted because a task at the device is being carried out Once the task has been completed the interrupted job automatically continues e Sending the device is sending the job through a network transmission e Completed the job was successfully completed without errors ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 257 Machine and Job Status Job Status e Waiting for Printer the job is ready to print and is waiting for the current job to finish printing and the required resources to become available e Formatting the job is being converted into the appropriate format For print tasks the job is decompressed for fax internet fax scan and e mail tasks the job is compressed e Scanning the device is currently scanning the image for this job ready for for
11. A4 or 8 5x11 media may be loaded either long edge feed or short edge feed Media sizes larger than A4 or 8 5x11 must be loaded short edge feed 1 Place the media in the correct orientation for the job The labels on the top of Tray 6 Inserter provide instructions for input and output orientations Refer to Orientation of Pre printed Media on page 246 2 The paper is registered centrally to the left edge of the tray Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 3 Make sure that the guides just touch the paper ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 245 Paper and Media Tray 6 Inserter Orientation of Pre printed Media It is important to load the media in the correct orientation so that it matches the output The table below compares the various original orientations and how the pre printed media should be loaded in each case Paper Size and Orientation Original Output Required Orientation A4 8 5x11 LEF Long Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Staple Bottom Left or non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or non stapled A4 8 5x11 LEF Booklets From A4 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed Originals A3 A411x17 8 5x11 SEF Booklets from A4 A3 or 11x17 8 5x11 SEF originals in booklet format 246 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media
12. Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the Job Assembly tab Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or asegment of pages You can select the appropriate settings to be applied to individual pages or segments of a completed job First split the originals into sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button 2 Select Display this window between segments to view the Build Job screen during scanning Then select Save 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the job 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build DI rte WL L b LL Some pages Some pages with textand 2 sided and some with some 1 sided photos El Build Job Segment Pages 2 Segment 1 1 Segment 2 1 Display this window between segments Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen SEL N e Load the second segment originals and press Start scanning and the job can be processed and c
13. Note Transparency Separators is not available if Auto Paper is selected 2 Select the Output Format tab then Transparency Separators and select On 3 Select the paper tray containing the paper for the separators 4 Select the tray that contains the transparencies 5 Select Save to confirm the selections and run the job Page Layout Output Color Image Quality Output Format Job Assembly Layout Adjustment Paper Supply L I p I 75 Auto Detect e Auto Select 2 Sided Copying Copy Output eye Collated l 1 Staple Black amp White i Portrait 211x17 More Plain Reduce Enlarge 38 8 5x11 Transparency 100 More El More 1 rae Ng Landscape Folding 2 2 Sided 2 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 More E Transparency Separators 6 Is Transparency Supply 75 9 1E A4 Plain 2M 11x17 2M 11x17 Plain Plain EN 6 3 8 511 E 6 3 8 511 Transparency Transparency E More More Separator Supply d 75 E 1E A4 Plain Tea CO 0 3 The Page Layout feature is ideal for handouts story boards or for archival purposes It allows up to 36 images to fit onto one sheet of paper Your device will reduce or enlarge the images as needed to display them either in landscape or portrait orientation on one page based on the paper supply selected The options are e Pages per Slide indiv
14. Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 User Guide 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents S lt ee 4012470002 ER EEN et tee Te e MEET 10 CODWODUOMS 222525 E 0022020 11 E 19 Layout e ge EE 22 OUTIOUE PORNO acre 2 NEEE EE 2 JODA OMD EEN 42 LOG TM Ra EEN 46 Se EE Ee 4 60 2222000 00202 90000 2 00000 20000 50 EE 51 PO E E E E EE E E E 58 aa e 2 7 70 60 8 2 POO ae es enedeneccescesecsees 65 eege 0 EA 73 0 5020 EE EE 5 ee ees oe oo ee ne a 76 en ve at gelaf e le e WEE 80 gages ne ee het ee oe ee oa Re ee eee een sess 81 Sever FOX 008 2002 0 20 84 neet ae lt 86 Layout 0 2 EAE OERE ESTEOS 88 SEENEN 90 JODA TEEN 91 ROG gie EE OU EE 92 Pe e EE 93 eg elef Tes e EE 96 EEN 97 Advanced SONGS ee EEE EENES 101 Layout e US CAST EE 104 Internet Fax Options lt
15. i 9 vn SE GE Note Special Pages is not available if erate EN Auto Select ceil collated Auto Paper is selected Sla ET Black White d Plain 1 2 Sided Portait 2 17 11 1 Staple More E 2 2 Sided ee E Beduce Enlarge a 3 85x11 Transparency 2 1 Sided More Folding Rotate Side 2 More El More KL 2 If required load special media into another paper tray ensuring that it is in the same orientation as the paper you are using for the body of your copies If using tab stock for your inserts refer to the Paper and Media guide for information about loading tabs Update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections 3 Select the Output Format tab Special Pages button and then TS Special Pages Inserts This feature controls how special pages are applied to your copied sets Covers can be blank or contain images They can also be printed on different paper than the rest of your job Chapter Starts ensure a chapter begins on the right or left side of the page with a blank page inserted if needed Inserts are non imaged single or multiple pages that are placed into your copied sets Exceptions are pages that are imaged on different paper 4 Select the After Page Number box and use the numeric keypad to enter insanis the page number you want the insert 7 Paper to follow eiser Note To add an insert before page 1 of your document use the Covers opt
16. oe Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over e Sideways Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the ir document feeder Use this option if your images are in the orientation matching the image shown when loaded in the document feeder e Portrait Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Portrait image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction e Landscape Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Landscape image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction Select Save to save your selections and exit 88 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Layout Adjustment Original Size Select Original Size to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection or Mixed Size Originals if scanning a mix of sizes The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and S S S SR 7 enables automatic size sensing The Original Si size detected is matched toa standard size paper F e Preset Scan Areas allows you to Auto Detect define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document sizes You c
17. options and an Available setting All of the presets can be customized with names and settings to meet your needs Hole Punch Erase Note The device applies an automatic edge deletion to all printed m output Se S e Select the preset option required from the Presets menu e Select the sides options as required Side 1 Side 2 and Mirror Side 1 e Select Name to customize the name of the preset option Use Clear Text to clear the existing name and enter a new name using the keyboard Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character entry Select Save e Enter the deletion amounts for the Top Bottom Left and Right margins The parameters entered are the defaults shown when the preset is selected Image Shift Presets Enables you to setup the Image Shift pre set entries There are 2 pre named preset options and an Available setting All of the Fone presets can be customized with names and eee GEI T settings to meet your needs lt Image Shift Presets e Select the preset option required from Gs the Presets menu H se SC E e Select Name to customize the name w Mirror Side 2 of the preset option Use Clear Text to clear the existing name and enter a i new name using the keyboard Use the backspace key to delete and incorrect character entry Select Save e Enter the amounts for shifting Up Down and Left Right for Side 1 e Enter the amounts for shifting Up Down and Left Right for Side
18. 7 Load the originals and select Start on the control panel to send the fax to the recipient s mailbox A Store to Remote Mailbox message is displayed for information If enabled by your System Administrator a report is printed once the documents are sent to the remote mailbox 68 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Fax Options Q d en ten FA LI A A fi 1 L m TO OCG IMICIDOX ef Se tv am M Ys 6 H L L WIA This feature allows you to store documents to be polled The document is stored in ae eee nse canes your mailbox and automatically sent to a remote fax machine when requested 1 Select the Store to Mailbox button cer Se Mailbox Passcode 2 Enter the Mailbox Number between F were 0000 9999 L Print Local Mailbox ns Stored documents will be deleted immediately after a successful Poll Docume Delete Local Mailbox Documents 001 and 200 9 3 Enter the Mailbox Passcode 4 Select Save to save your selections and exit 5 Load the originals and select Start Your fax job is scanned and stored in the mailbox and the Mailboxes screen returns Dr nr fe Lr CFI A A fi H L AY F ArI Iman g 1 l L LS L Bee 6 IN VA j a 0 WIN lt VJ U l Cc l La Faxes stored in your mailbox can be printed SE Mailboxes 1 Select the Print Local Mailbox Documents button Mailbox Number Off 01 200 2 Enter the
19. 96 148 180 201 Setting Accounting 297 Audio Tones 274 Automatic Banding Fix 302 Calibration 301 Configuration Report 283 Contention Management 279 Copy Service 285 Date amp Time 272 Display Brightness 283 Embedded Fax 288 Energy Saver 271 Fax Reports 294 Fax Setup 283 Input Options 278 Interrupt Printing Enablement 284 Job Deletion 299 Job Sheets 295 Language Keyboard Layout 272 Mailbox Setup 293 Measurements 273 Network Echo Test 303 On Demand Image Overwrite 299 Output Options 279 Paper Size Preference 274 275 Paper Tray Management 274 Print Quality Problems 301 Reset UI Settings 284 Resets 302 Security 299 Supply Counter Reset 281 Timers 276 Transmission Defaults 291 Xerox Customer Support 273 Settings 270 271 Setup Accounting 297 Setup Fax Reports 294 Sharpness 20 60 101 153 186 Size of Original 62 Size of Originals 89 105 157 167 SMart eSolutions 224 SMart Kits 264 Software Reset 302 Solid Ink Usage 264 Solutions to Problems 321 Solving Problems 315 Special Pages 29 Speed Dialing 51 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 351 Index Staple Cartridges 311 Stapling Options 14 Starting Rate 66 Status Information 222 262 Stock 238 Store in Mailbox 68 Store to USB 213 Stored Addresses 99 Stored Fax Numbers 51 82 Server Fax 81 Storing Paper 318 Subject 98 182 Supplies Assistant 224 Supplies Information 264 Supply Counter Reset 28
20. Address Book 2 Select the e mail address required _ d SES and select Add To Add Cc or Add Book Bcc from the drop down menu Recipients The e mail address is added to the recipient list 3 Continue adding e mail addresses as required 4 Use the Search option to search for a specific entry Select Search and enter the name required using the keyboard Select Search to start the search The matching entries are displayed Select the name required and add the recipient to the list using the drop down menu 5 To search different address books use Fe the Public Address Book or Network Address Book option Select the Address Books me and select Search SS Address Book required using the drop down menu to the left of the field and El TI o emm TI Le DW search using the same method Par T TT TT hl described 6 To find out more information about eT TTT HIH an address in the Address Book select TTT b AAL B l Details Ful aozas e enee address owner are displayed Select Close to exit the Details window Output Color Select Output Color to automatically detect and match the color of your original or produce monotone full color or a single color output from your original The options are e Auto Detect to select output that Ces men a mn TR matches your original e Black amp White to select mon
21. Advanced Settings e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the More setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Less setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned image A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e 72 dpi recommended for output displayed on a computer It produces the smallest file size pe Resolution 72 dpi Acceptable image quality for on screen viewing e 100 dpi recommended for output that delivers low quality text documents Smallest file size 100 dpi Suitable for on screen viewing only Print Quality will not be acceptable e 150 dpi recommended for average q
22. N Fax Directory 2 Sided Scanning Original Type Resolution 1 Sided Photo Standard 200x100 dpi 2 Select an empty slot from the list of entries If necessary use the scroll bar Fax Directory Fax Number Recipients 1 01234 568976 01234 264587 3 Enter the fax number in the Edit Fax Number field Use the C button to delete an incorrect entry or the Clear Text button to delete the entire entry SE L Dial Pause Select Save E Cong ose Mask Data DI Group Dial Pulse to Tone 5 Password Check w Wait for Network Tone Optional Readability Character The new entry is displayed in the list 4 To use the entry for the current job select the entry in the list and select Gage Add To Recipients The number is added to the Recipients list Fax Number Recipients 5 To edit an entry select it in the list and select the Edit button Edit the entry as required and select Save 6 To exit from the Fax Directory select Close ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 83 Server Fax Server Fax Options Server Fax Options These Server Fax options provide access to fax features which are required for programing basic server fax jobs To access the Fax options select Services Home and Server Fax The Server Fax tab is displayed 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned The options are e 1 S
23. Please contact your local disposal authority for information In some member states when you purchase new equipment your local retailer may be required to take back your old equipment free of charge Please ask you retailer for information Prior to disposal please contact your local dealer or Xerox representative for end of life takeback information ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 343 Safety and Regulations Product Recycling and Disposal Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and Used Batteries These symbols on the products and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation and the Directive 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with nationa
24. Scan to Mailbox allows you to scan hard copy originals and store them on the device for later retrieval To use Scan to Mailbox you must first create a private folder using Internet Services You must give the folder a name and a secure password Once set up the private folder is displayed on the device under the templates list To store images in your private folder select the folder in the list of templates enter your passcode and scan your images The scanned images can then be retrieved at your PC by accessing Internet Services selecting your folder and entering your passcode You can then print your scanned documents or download them to your PC The Workflow Scanning option needs to be installed before this feature can be used but it is NOT necessary for the Workflow Scanning repositories and templates to be configured Creating a Private Folder Your System Administrator enables the Scan to Mailbox feature using Internet Services To use Scan to Mailbox you must setup a personal folder using Internet Services To access Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For Za 4 example If the IP Address is 7 enter the following ie ias XEROX ColorQube 9303 192 168 100 100 into the URL field L aaia ee ee http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options f
25. image quality settings the owner finishing options sender s e mail address etc Held Jobs If a job is Held in the list it requires additional resources or a passcode to print 1 Select the job in the list and select Job Details then Required Resources Active Jobs Completed Jobs All Jobs JobStatus doc 3 Printing MachineStatus doc 4 Held Secure Print BTVu JobStatus doc 4 Held Secure Print Roeie x Delete A amp special dor Zh Held Resources Required Job Progress Special doc 4 Held Pay For Print Special doc A Held for Multiple Reasons 260 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status The resources required for the job are displayed Ensure the job resources are available in order for the job to print Select Close to exit the Job Details screen If the job is a Secure Print or Fax joba passcode is required to release the job for printing Select the job in the list and select Release Enter the passcode For Secure Print jobs it must match the passcode entered when the job was submitted using the print driver For Secure Fax jobs it must match the code entered when Secure Receive was enabled in Tools If the passcode is valid the job is released for printing Note If multiple secure jobs are held in the list and require the same secure Job Status Required Resources __ Plain Plain 4 Unknown 4 Unknown 8 5 x 11 11 8 5 Active Jo
26. needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your equipment Your Xerox product and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency evaluation and certification and compliance with electromagnetic regulations and established environmental standards The safety and environment testing and performance of this product have been verified using Xerox materials only A WARNING Unauthorized alterations which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices may impact the product certification Please contact your Xerox representative for more information 328 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Safety Labels and Symbols Safety Labels and Symbols All warnings and instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed A WARNING This label alerts users to an area of the equipment which includes a sharp edge which could cause laceration in the event that extreme force is used on the guard which prevents contact in normal use The edge is colored yellow to indicate the area which should be avoided A WARNING These labels alert users to areas of the equipment which are heated The surfaces are safe to touch but long term contact may result in discomfort ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Operational Safety Information Your Xerox equipment and supplies have been
27. number of faxes and number of large sheets Configuration This section displays the configuration of the device and the option to print a configuration report Consumables This option provides information on the life of the device consumables such as the Ink Sticks and Cleaning Unit Status eon Adidrras Book Properties Support DA Usage Counters ng Informator Configwranon Report Suoplet Trers Intormaner Pages SMart 5205 La T ack Impress Bleck Copied Imprecsicns Slack Pnnted Impressions Color Impressions Cclor Camed Impressions Color Printed Impresmons Embedsed Fax pras N black Stored Image Preted Impressione Color Stored Image Pretec Impressions Back Copied Sheets Color Cocied Sheets Diack Printed Sheets Color Srimed Sheets Cmbedded fax Sheets Back Copied 2 Back Copied Large Sheets Color Copied Larga Sheets Back Zed Large Sheets Cclor rimed Large Sheets L Embedded fax Large Sheats shan ezsiutgng Print Configuration Page Support Welcome A Alerts Siro irfermeten Usage Counters Cenfiguratsc Repot 3 1113 s 3 sticks HA n II Trays i o 1 E Information Pepes San eSciuvers i 2 t gt sticks sticks Wire 42 one 3 EE Bo ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 223 Internet Services Status Trays This area displays status information NEE about all the paper t
28. 12 21 07 1 41 44 PM C System 11 07 07 9 28 28 AM 4 Select the features required for your Print From job ete St paper source or select Auto for i the device to choose a suitable paper supply e 2 Sided Printing use to select 1 or 2 sided output or select Auto for the device to choose an Paper Supply 2Sided Printing amp Finishing appropriate option erg St e Finishing use to select a specific finishing option for the output or select Auto for the device to choose an appropriate option 5 Select the Quantity box and enter the number of copies required using the numeric keypad 6 Press Start to print the job 7 The Job Progress screen is displayed Select Job Status to view status information or use Program Next Job to run a different job When you have finished printing remove the USB Flash Drive from the USB port 218 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 USB Port Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button
29. 2 Select Mirror Side 2 if the shift for the second side should be the same as for the first side The parameters entered are the defaults shown when the preset is selected 286 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets This feature enables you to set 10 4 G x ance proportional reduce enlarge preset ratios WE RE WE Customizable 25 gt 400 and 4 preset independent reduce enlarge i roportional reset ratios 1 ae 8 5x11 e Select Proportional and then enter vege l Preset 6 the preset ratios required for each E preset option Between 25 and eng 400 can be entered 141 E e If you wish to reset all the preset 4 Preset 8 proportional preset values back to the SS SE e Common Values default settings select Reset All to Default e Use the Common Values option to view the ratios for common reduce enlarge activities e Select Independent and enter the preset ratios required for each preset option A separate ratio is required for the X and Y options Between 25 and 400 can be entered Reading Order Options This option allows you to show or hide the Reading Order option Book Copying and Booklet Creation options assume that the Feat bound originals and booklets have a Q ide reading order reading order of left to right and are 121 teasing ore scanned or printed in this order by default If there is a requirem
30. 2 Printed Separators EY Separator Color BG nee ee Y e Select Blank Separators or Printed Separators using the Separator Options drop down menu e Select the Separator Color Note This feature will add a separator between each transparency These settings wll only apply when the paper type is set to Transparency 130 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Paper Output 2 Sided Printing You can have your job automatically printed on both sides of a sheet of paper e 1 Sided Print prints on one side of the paper or transparency Use this option when printing on transparencies envelopes or labels e 2 Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet of paper The images are printed so the job can be bound on the long edge of the sheet e 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints on both sides of a sheet of paper The images are printed so the job can be bound on the short edge of the sheet Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be automatically printed on both sides Refer to www xerox com for specifications information Finishing Use to select the finishing options for the print job such as stapling or hole punching To change the finishing options select the button to the right of the summary to display the finishing selection drop down menu Stapling e Select the number or location of staples required to staple each set e Select No Stapling to switch off stapling Note The stapling options vary
31. 250 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Media Types Unacceptable Types The following envelope characteristics are not acceptable e Side seamed construction e Announcement or catalogue envelopes e Windows e Board backed e Padded e Self adhesive with release strips e Clasps of any kind ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 251 Paper and Media Storage and Handling Storage and Handling It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored correctly Take note of the following when storing media e Store at ambient temperature Damp paper may cause problems or poor image quality e Donot open reams of paper until they are required for use The ream wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture e Store on a flat surface to prevent the paper from folding or curling e Stack reams of paper carefully on top of one another to avoid crushing the edges Do not stack more than five reams on top of each other For problem free printing and copying observe the following when loading paper into the paper trays e Do not use folded or wrinkled papers e Donot load paper of varied sizes into the tray e If feed problems occur fan the media or shuffle labels before loading 252 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the Un
32. 58 84 97 117 128 150 181 Orientation of Originals 22 88 104 156 167 189 Original 104 Original Orientation 22 88 104 156 167 189 Original Size 23 62 89 105 157 167 Original Type 19 58 84 100 151 Output Color 11 99 150 166 Output Option Settings 279 Overwrite Settings 160 P Pages per Slide 39 Paper Problems 318 Paper Size Preference Setting 274 275 Paper Supply 238 Paper Tray Management Settings 274 Paper Tray Status 222 PDF 106 159 PDF A 159 Phonebook 118 Polling 70 Polling a Mailbox 70 Power Outlet Electrical Safety 330 Pre Programed Settings 44 45 Print 126 228 Print Confirmation Report 65 Print From USB 212 350 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Index Print from USB 214 Print From 200 Create New Folder 205 Managing Saved Jobs 205 Modify or Delete Folder 205 Printing Saved Jobs at the device 201 Printing Saved Jobs from Internet Services 202 Saved Jobs 227 Saving Jobs using Internet Services 204 Saving Jobs using the Printer Driver 203 USB Port Printing 201 Print Mailbox Documents 68 Print Quality Maintenance 313 Print Quality Problems 320 Private Folders 169 Problem Solving 315 Problem Statements 321 Problems 264 Document Feeder 319 Finishing 318 Image Quality 320 Paper 318 Product Recycling and Disposal 343 Product Safety Certification 333 Proof Copy 43 Properties 231 Q Quality File Size 103 155 167 Quic
33. 9302 9303 Fax Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents TOUTO ee T a EE E E E E A A AEREE EEEE ERESSE 80 8 red e EE 81 MEME NR e te e NEE 81 Beileed te a EE 81 0 E 82 Server Fax Options EE 84 2 ded SCANNING EE 84 ONOMA IV OS reas E TISA 84 MI de 85 aleet elt 86 WNC Ge OP HON EE 86 000803 E 86 Layout Adjustment 88 EY Tsis e n 2 esae resor reae EAE eee evan canoes es eo os ee eka we tone ooo shew se 284 88 Bitte Det EEN 89 FOX ODORS T eee eee eee ease EE 90 e NEE 90 JOD AS ODIY EEN 91 Te 00 1 Dap 92 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 79 Server Fax Introduction Introduction Server Fax is a standard feature that can be enabled If enabled it is selected by pressing the Services Home button then ke the Server Fax option Print From Server Fax scans your documents and sends them
34. 9302 9303 247 Paper and Media Media Types e Load pre punched paper with the holes on the left edge in Tray 4 Bypass and Tray 5 Note If the deletion will affect the output image refer to the Copy guide for instructions on using Image Shift A CAUTION Before loading the media make sure that any plugs the round pieces cut out of the paper to create the holes do not remain in the stack If they get into the system they can cause jams and can also damage the internal components of the device Fan the media to help separate the individual sheets Transparencies Transparencies are used to create images that can be projected on to a screen for presentations or as covers Transparencies are made of polyester film coated with a chemical substance Clear transparencies allow maximum presentation space Note Only Tray 4 Bypass can be used to feed transparencies e Load transparencies which have a white strip along one edge with the strip to the left and on the underside of the transparencies e Fan transparencies to stop them sticking together e Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same size paper If a coating of oil remains on the transparency after printing remove it with a lint free cloth Pre Printed Use this option for pre printed paper such as letterheads and forms e Load pre printed paper face up and with the top towards the front of the device in Trays 1 2 3 and Tray 6 Inserter e Load pre p
35. 9303 How To Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features refer to Log In Out on page 46 10 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Copy Options eo SO Copy Image Quality EE Output Format Job Assembly The Copy tab includes basic copying selections such as Output Color Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying and Copy Output Each option is described 9 Ch EK in detail below Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output Auto Detect Auto Select 1 1 Sided Collated gt d 4 1 Staple Black amp White Plain 1 2 Sided Portrait 11x17 O utp ut Co lo r More EI Sg 2 2 Sided Reduce Enlarge C 38 8 5x11 Folding Transparency LL side Re The Output Color options include gt EI wm selections to automatically detect and ges O oras match the color of your original or produce monotone full color or a single color output from your original Use More to access all the options The options are e Auto Detect to select output that lk oon clic coe matches your original Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output e Black amp White to select monotone 6 ia 75 Cz T output regardless of the color of your SS original 1 Staple 14 Black amp White L ain 1 2 Sided ortrai e Color to select color output from your e Portrait Auto Select 1 1
36. A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used in accordance with these instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiver e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox could void the user s authority to operate the equipment To ensure compliance with Part 15 of the FCC rules use shielded interface cables Canada Regulations This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme 6 la norme NMB 003 du Canada Euro
37. A4 or 8 5x11 LEF or 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper A3 or 11 x 17 Tray 6 Post Process Inserter An optional paper tray for use with the High Volume Finisher It is used to insert pre printed sheets into copy sets The device cannot print on sheets fed from this tray The capacity for this tray is 250 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper The trays automatically detect low media and out of media conditions A warning message is displayed on the screen when a tray requires loading Always use the labels in each of the trays for guidance on loading orientations and maximum fill information 238 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Trays 1 and 2 Trays 1 and 2 Trays 1 and 2 are located on the front of the device and feed the majority of media sizes Media can be loaded Long Edge Feed LEF or Short Edge Feed SEF Your device uses a system of programable settings to manage the trays and media These settings are established by your System Administrator who can set Trays 1 and 2 to Fully Adjustable or Dedicated Fully Adjustable if this option is set the paper settings screen is displayed each time the tray is opened and closed The drop down menus are used to change the size type and color of the media loaded The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non standard media size is used Dedicated when a tray is opened a screen is
38. F 56 All Supplies Cyan Ink C 70 5 32000 FA 164 Yellow Ink Y 71 33 000 FA 167 Estimated Pages Black Ink K 84 40 000 203 Remaining Document Feeder Feed Roller 98 150 000 703 ae Cleaning Unit 70 100 000 P ss 264 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Billing Information This tab provides device utilization and Machine ne lt n EE performance statistics This information is typically used by Xerox or third party Supplies information Information Machine Serial Number KMM 0000505 236 Usage Counters organizations to calculate billings Counter count pertaining to leasing or other warranty Lever x impressions and maintenance agreements Color Level 2 Impressions U sag Co u nte rs Color Level 3 Impressions The Usage Counters track all input output functions scanning functions and Total Impressions 44 246 912 performance data Impression Counters displays the total number of impressions the device has made along with various levels of color impressions Sheet Counters displays the number of sheets that have passed through the device in each of the job categories Images Sent Counters displays the number of Fax Server Fax Internet Fax E mail and Workflow Scanning images which have been sent from the device Fax Impressions Counters displays the number of prints generated from fax server fax and internet fax jobs recei
39. If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is 28 j enabled the user will also have ff fem Oo e to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details e If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID e If aForeign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display To log out select the Log In Out E ar button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu x Close e Local User 00 Account Name A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 215 USB Port Log In Out 216 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 USB Port Version 1 0 Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will
40. Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 110 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX
41. Protocols 4 Delawit your System Administrator Refer to the System Administrator Guide E rien for information about configuring your cen device Internet Pas 0 Defaut ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 231 Internet Services Support Support The Support option contains the General and Troubleshooting tabs The General tab displays the name and telephone number of your System Fn Administrator and the telephone numbers Assisi tanks you should use for Customer Support and s aces es y s 53 Supplies S Hachine Hedel Use the Troubleshooting tab to access En reports and information to help identify E tre a Address xa 75 et and resolve device problems Lp Address Liwk Leecal Customer Support harn eSolutians fede 90919766 2 Servier Send Biagnos bc infonmacdon 10 Reno Michie komio Alert Machine Heda Gter oe At an Online Trening Aaner 5 i WAAT oa The Dodie Feeder of rated E Feu Ess 5 WES the Decument Feeder AN aching tarvet 232 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Help Help Select the Help button to display the Help screens The structure of the Help screens corresponds to the structure of the Internet Services options Use the menu on the left of the Help page to access descriptions and instructions about all the features a
42. Ravioli aa Report Job 894 GS Completed Ravioli E mail 333 GA Completed Ravioli Network Scan 345 KA Completed ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 259 Machine and Job Status Job Status Managing Jobs Manage your Active Jobs using the Job Commands e Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed Owner Name GKern 4 Special doc A Held Resources Required GKern 4 Special doc A Held Pay For Print Active Jobs Completed Jobs GKern Special doc A Held for Multiple Reasons gt Toaccess the Job Commands highlight the required job in the list The job command buttons available en depend on the selected job Name CVillone 4 JobStatus doc Printing Active Jobs Completed Jobs e The following options are available machineStatus doc fd Hel e Delete removes the selected job a 2 from the list Any job can be l deleted using the feature ee n regardless of the job originator S Special dr Ai e Release is selected if a Secure Ai Print job has been held in the list and a passcode is required in order for the job to print e Promote is used to move a job to the top of the list It will be completed after the current job e Job Progress displays status information about an individual job e Job Details can be accessed for incomplete and completed jobs Depending on the type of a selected job e g copy print etc the details show the submission time
43. Sided Collated S 1 end og 2 2 Sided Landscape 17 2 11 original More EI Reduce Enlarge H ECTS Transparency 100 g More 2 1 Sided Folding e Single Color to select a single color output regardless of the color of your Rotate Side 2 More original Choose from T lee e Red e Green e Blue e Cyan e Green e Yellow e Magenta Reduce Enlarge A variety of options are available on your device to enable you to reduce or enlarge the output from your original This includes selecting a specific ratio either proportionately or independently and choosing from a selection of pre defined preset buttons For convenience easy access to ratio selection can be found on the Copy tab in the Reduce Enlarge area Use More to access all the options Images from originals placed on the document glass can be enlarged or reduced by any ratio between 400 and 25 Images from originals fed through the document feeder can be enlarged or reduced by any ratio between 200 and 25 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 11 Copy Copy Options 56 the butt NS n the EF Copy Image Quality Output Format Job Assembly justment Copy screen to select the required Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output reduction or enlargement percentage 9 J wr 5 S Auto Detect Auto Select 1 1 Sided Collated 5 Black amp White LI 1 2 Sided E l S oe EI ER ege l 1 Staple e Se
44. This option is used to enter a message for the internet fax The message is the text contained within the fax and not the subject line 1 Using the keyboard enter the message required S Message e Upto 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the Pa a m a de 1 back arrow key or to clear the Kr TTT TT entire entry select Clear Text rT TT I oe gt Use the Keyboards button to LOTT LTT Te EN access additional language J L G n keyboards SCH E 2 Select Save to save the selections and exit Reply To The Reply To feature enables you to include an e mail address you want the recipient to reply to For example you can enter your personal e mail address If you logged in through authentication and your details are available in the Address Book your e mail address is displayed 1 Using the keyboard enter the message required Reply To e Upto 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 2 Select Save to save the selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 107 Internet Fax Internet Fax Options Acknowledgement Report Using this feature a confirmation report is printed indicating the delivery status of the internet fax job Each internet fax recipient provides a delivery receipt whe
45. With io sizes shown on the screen if they are SE not available e g if an A4 documentis Ba ceed EE received for printing and only 8 5x11 WK paper is available the device E substitutes 8 5x11 for A4 If Disable Note some image loss may occur when is selected the device does not ee substitute the sizes shown In this instance a job would be held in the job list until the correct paper size is loaded e Replace 8 5 x 14 is used to automatically substitute 8 5x14 paper with A3 or 11x17 if 8 5x14 paper is requested but is not available If Disable is selected the device does not substitute the paper Paper Size Preference This option is used to select the most frequently used paper size formats e Inches for formats such as 8 5x11 or 11x17 e Metric for formats such as A4 or A3 Tray Settings Use to apply attributes to each paper tray G Be so they operate productively in your own Se working environment You can assign trays ie Priority Auto Selection as dedicated to a specific paper size and type and setup Auto Selection and the selection Priority of each tray Select the tray required and select Change Settings Select the Tray Type required e Dedicated is set to contain one size and type of media only and cannot be adjusted by the user e Adjustable is selected if the tray can be adjusted by the user to contain any media within specification This option may not be available fo
46. a Read Only Public folder Any user can print from the folder but documents cannot be deleted or modified e The Private folder is created by a user only when the device is in Authentication mode The User marks the folder as Private and the folder is only visible to the Owner and the System Administrator 8 When you have selected the appropriate Permissions select Apply The Folder is displayed in the Folders List Modify or Delete Folder You can modify or delete existing folders that contain Saved Jobs using Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For 4 example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 1 00 enter the following i ec aas XEROX ColorQube 9303 kia Pn into the URL field http 192 168 100 100 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 205 Print From Saving Jobs for use with Print From 206 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions Select the Jobs option Select Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options Select Manage Folders The window displays all the Public folders and any Private folders belonging to you Check the box next to the folder you want to modify Sele
47. and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ag ele Eege EE 114 FAXING teen EE 115 FOX fromt PG El Lee EE 117 ele EE 117 Mea LEE 117 COVEPSNGCE ge 0002250200 00000 cues 119 le el EE 120 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 113 Fax from PC Introduction Introduction The Fax from PC service on the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Driver enables you to send a fax to any fax machine over the telephone network from your PC or workstation The great advantage of this feature is that you do not have to print your document before you send it as a fax and you can accomplish the complete task without leaving your workstation The 2 requirements for this option are e A connected printer configuration e Fax must be enabled on the device There are 3 main screens that enable the setup and use of Fax from PC gt The Recipients screen is used to address your fax by either entering recipients individually or from address books e The Cover Sheet tab provides the facility to send a cover sheet with your fax e The Options window enables the user to program additional options for the fax job such as selecting a confirmation sheet the send speed and resolution You can also spe
48. depending on the type of finisher Hole Punching e Select Hole Punch to punch the paper e Select No Hole Punching to switch off hole punching Note The number of holes punched and their location depend on the hole punch unit in the finisher Folding e Bi Fold the page will be folded once to create two leaves e Fold folds the output twice to create three leaves with the outer flap folded over the inner flap e Z Tri Fold folds the output to twice to create three leaves in a Z effect e Select No Folding to switch off folding ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 131 Print Paper Output Booklet Creation Select this menu item to display the Booklet Creation screen to select booklet layout and booklet finishing options Booklet Creation d Booklet Finishing R C 7 None Booklet Finishing Et H Booklet Fold Sell Gei Booklet Fold and Staple e Select Booklet Fold to fold the booklet Be eet DOKIG ayour e Select Booklet Fold and Staple to staple the booklet in O None the center and then fold Booklet Layout Print Page Borders Booklet Layout Booklet Paper Size e Using this option the document pages are rearranged Automatically Select into the correct sequence to create the booklet 7 e Use Print Page Borders to place a border around the images or text on each page SR Gutter 0 216 Points oT 4 Booklet Paper Size Creep 0 0 1 0 Points e Use Automatical
49. document size information Paper Problems The device has designated misfeed clearance areas If a misfeed occurs a message and clearance instructions are displayed on the touch screen There are also labels showing how to clear each area When clearing the paper path ensure all the areas stated are checked and cleared Before closing the front door ensure that all handles and levers are returned to their correct position If misfeeds persist or occur intermittently check the following points Handling of Media For optimum printing results observe the following when loading paper into the trays e Do not use folded or wrinkled paper e Donot load paper of varied sizes into the tray e Always fan transparencies and shuffle labels before loading Labels and transparencies can only be loaded into Tray 4 Bypass e Before loading paper into the trays fan the edges This procedure separates any sheets of paper that are stuck together and reduces the possibility of misfeeds Storing of Media It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored correctly Take note of the following when storing paper e Store in ambient room temperature Damp paper may cause feed problems or poor image quality e Do not open paper packages until they are required for use The wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture e Store on a flat surface to avoid folding or curling of paper e Stack reams of paper carefully
50. features refer to Log In Out on page 207 200 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From Using Print From Using Print From The Print From service can be used to print saved jobs which have been stored on the device or PDF TIFF JPEG XPS and other print ready files which have been stored on a USB Flash Drive Jobs stored on the device can be also be printed using Internet Services Using the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 1 Press the Clear All AC button twice and then Confirm to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Print From option Jobs can be printed from the device or from the USB Flash Drive e Saved Jobs To print a job stored 2 saved tops v on the device select the drop 0 down menu and select Saved Type Owner Jobs _ Jobs e USB Drive To print jobs from a USB Flash Drive insert your USB Flash Drive into the USB port located on the left side of the device The USB Drive Detected screen appears Select Print from USB Es Print From EZ The list of folders and jobs Select the folder required and the print ready job required If necessary use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the list until the folder or job is displayed the features required for your 7 Pit From e Paper Supply use to select the KEE seb paper size type and color or 3 select Auto for the devi
51. from generating electricity The default time settings for the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 are 5 minutes and 60 minutes ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 345 Safety and Regulations EH amp S Contact Information EH amp S Contact Information For more information on Environment Health and Safety in relation to this Xerox product and supplies please contact the following customer help lines USA 1 800 828 6571 Canada 1 800 828 6571 Europe 44 1707 353 434 Product safety information is also available on the Xerox website www xerox com about xerox environment 346 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Index Numerics 2 Sided 13 58 84 100 131 151 2 Sided Scanning 166 A Accessing Tools 270 Accounting 299 Settings 297 Acknowledgement Report 65 108 116 120 168 Active Jobs 227 Add File Destinations 161 Address Book 51 53 99 118 183 230 Group Entry 55 Individual Entry 54 82 Setting Up 54 Valid Recipients Setting 300 Administration Settings 270 Advanced Settings 166 Alerts 222 All Services 171 174 Copy 10 E mail 180 Fax 50 Internet Fax 96 Server Fax 80 Workflow Scanning 148 All Services Default 273 Annotations 34 Audio Tones Setting 274 Auto Center 13 Automatic Banding Fix 302 321 Automatic Print Quality Maintenance 313 B Background Suppression 20 60 86 101 153 154 186 Banner Sheets Setup 295 Basic Options 58 84 97 117 128 Basic Safety
52. graininess appears on e Reprint the job the output e Use a higher quality print mode e Print 1 sided rather than 2 sided e Use a smoother paper Missing or weak image on output Reprint the job Make sure paper is the correct type and size and is properly loaded in the tray Dots on copies Reprint the job Make sure the defect is not on the original Clean the document glass and the Constant Velocity Transport CVT glass Marks on the lead edge of paper stack which Reprint the job are in line with the image Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Run 20 blank sheets through the device Oil in long edge feed LEF paper edges at top Reprint the job and bottom after running long jobs of short edge feed SEF Tray 1 and 2 or 3 raise failure e Reprint the job e Open and close the tray Tray 1 and 2 misfeed e Reprint the job e Check the tray side guides are tight against the stack of paper Turn or rotate the stack over if possible unless using media with a defined paper print side ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 323 General Care and Troubleshooting Further Assistance Further Assistance For any additional help visit our customer web site at www xerox com or contact the Xerox Welcome and Support Center quoting the device serial number e Press the Machine Status button on the control panel The Machine Information tab is displayed e The Cu
53. images They can also be printed on different paper than the rest of your job m Chapter Starts ensure a chapter begins on the right or left side of the Chapter Starts page with a blank page inserted if needed Inserts are non imaged single or multiple pages that are placed into your copied sets Exceptions are pages that are imaged on different paper 4 Select the Covers Option required e lfa Cancel e Front amp Back Same is used if the E e Uz same media and printing options Covers Options Printing Options Paper Supply are required for both covers Ir Blank Cover Raa e Front amp Back Different is used Front amp Back Same F R f Blank Cover for front and back covers with nsec Different E 2 Print on Side 1 different programing e Front Cover Onl RE ar requirements e Front Cover Only is used if only a Geer front cover is required e Back Cover Only is used if only a back cover is required 5 Select a Printing Option from the drop down menu for each of the covers required e Blank Cover is used if no printing is required e Print on Side 1 is used to print the first or last page of your document onto side 1 of the front or back cover sheet e Print on Side 2 is used to print the first or last page of your document onto side 2 of the front or back cover sheet e Print on Both Sides is used to print the first or last two pages of your document onto side 1 and si
54. in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalent Numbers of all of the devices does not exceed 5 For the Canadian REN value please see the label on the equipment Europe Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive The Facsimile has been approved in accordance with the Council Decision 1999 5 EC for pan European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network PSTN However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries the approval does not of itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network terminal point In the event of a problem you should contact your authorized local dealer in the first instance This product has been tested to and is compliant with ES 203 021 1 2 3 a specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area This product provides an user adjustable setting of the country code Refer to the
55. list 4 Select Close to return to the fax options 52 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Dialing Options Address Book The Address Book is used to store individual fax numbers or groups of fax numbers which are used frequently Up to 200 individual entries and 40 Group entries can be stored For each number stored transmission settings can also be set The Address Book can be accessed from all screens where a fax number requires entering Use the following instructions to setup and use Individual or Group entries If numbers have been entered into the Address Book they can be accessed via the Address Book button 1 Select the Address Book button A list of individuals entered in the E Address Book is displayed 8 u je IE 2 Select the required recipient and select Add to Recipients from the drop down menu The number is added to the Recipients list Speed Dial Name Fax Number Recipients 002 Allen lverson 569 2222 l j j ini eve Nash Z Continue adding recipients as required 3 Toadda Group entry to the list select Fe the Individuals drop down menu and Jie pani Pick select Groups The available Groups S are displayed Select the Group required and select Add to Recipients Recipients from the drop down menu The Group is added to the Recipients o2 uae ist Ee Continue adding Individual or Group entries as required 4 To edit an existing entry select the entry from the list and selec
56. list ready to be transmitted Select the Job Status button on the control panel to display the job list Your job will be displayed in the list If there are no other jobs in the list your job may have already been processed Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for more information ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Fax from PC Options Recipients Use the Recipients option to enter a recipient or group of recipients for your fax 1 Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open This screen displays the recipients for the current fax It will normally rete ec be empty To add a new recipient select the Add Recipient button 2 Enter the following information for the recipient e Name e Fax Number e Organization e Telephone Number e E mail Address e Mailbox Sal 3 Select the Save to Personal Phonebook if you want to add the Preferences recipient to your Personal Phonebook Select OK to confirm your entry Your entry has been added to the recipient list A To enter a recipient from a phonebook select the Add From Phonebook button You can choose from 3 Phonebooks Personal Shared and Shared LDAP The Personal and Shared phonebook information is stored in data files The file for your Personal phonebook will be located on your PC or personal file space The file for the Shared phonebook will be located on a server a
57. minutes and WILL Print File directories and Scan to Mailbox jobs Fax dial directories and Mailbox contents Full Overwrite will take approximately 60 minutes Press Overwrite Now to run the selected Overwrite ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 Administration and Accounting Security Settings A Full Overwrite takes approximately 60 minutes and includes all data Select the Overwrite option required and select Overwrite Now to run the overwrite process IP Sec IP Sec is a security protocol enabled using Internet Services To disable IP Sec on the device select the Disable IP Sec option Valid Recipients This feature sets the parameters for allowed recipients in the E mail and Internet Fax Services e Allow any valid E mail Address enables jobs to be sent to any reci p i ent EE This feature sets the parameters for allowed recipients in the E mail and Internet Fax Services Valid Recipients e Limit to Address Book entries only E CO en any valid E mail Address only allows you to send to addresses Limit to Address Address Book envies ony Note The New Recent and the Raply To fentures that have been entered into the Address Book The New Recipient and the Reply To features are disabled 300 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting These settings are used to troubleshoot any problems that maybe occurring on the device They provide various tests to ch
58. on page 2 2 e Custom Keyboard Button on page 273 e Xerox Customer Support on page 273 e Entry Screen Defaults on page 273 e Measurements on page 273 e Paper Size Preference on page 273 e Audio Tones on page 274 Energy Saver The device is designed to be energy efficient and automatically reduces its power consumption after periods of inactivity This utility enables the Administrator to modify the time the device spends between standby low power and sleep modes e Intelligent Ready wakes up and sleeps automatically based on previous usage e Job Activated wakes up when activity is detected Machine Information Faults 7 General Paper Management Machine Information faules Device Settings Billing aries information Device Settings i Supplies Supplies Device Settings Service Settings Network Settings Accounting Settings General Features Security Settings Troubleshooting Pad Energy Saver Customize the Energy Saver settings to your usage Fast Resume reduces the time taken to wake up This will change the default sleep low power timeouts and increase energy usage e Intelligent Ready EI Job Activated EI Scheduled Intelligent Ready wakes up and sleeps automatically based on previous usage Job Activated wakes up when activity is detected Scheduled wakes up and sleeps at set times on a daily basis ColorQube 9301 9302 9303
59. on top of one another to avoid crushing the edges Do not stack more than five reams on top of each other Finishing Problems The finishing devices can occasionally experience misfeed stapler hole punch or stacking problems If a problem occurs a message and clearance instructions are displayed on the touch screen If problems persist or occur intermittently check the following points e Unload the finisher tray frequently e Donot remove stapled sets while the finisher is compiling e Check the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper e When using large paper remove any output contained in the Stacker Tray 318 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If the paper curls excessively flip the paper over in the applicable paper tray Check the correct paper size has been selected for the paper loaded in the tray To correct stapling problems use less than 50 sheets of paper if the paper is heavier than 80 gsm 20 lb Check that the Hole Punch Waste Container is not full The container collects waste from the hole punch Refer to Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container on page 313 for instructions If a stapler problem occurs use the instructions below to clear the problem Office Finisher If a problem occurs in the office Finisher Stapler remove the Stapler Cartridge and release any misfed staples Refer to Staple Cartridges on page 311 for instructions on removi
60. option to hear the tone selected Paper Management Select the Paper Management option to Kam Fauts ae Sie access the following settings Device Settings 7 Paper Management e Paper Type amp Color on page 274 e Paper Substitution on page 275 Service Settings ee e Paper Size Preference on page 275 gt Tray Settings on page 275 e Tray Contents on page 276 Paper Type amp Color Allows the programing of the default media type and color This is usually the most common media that is used in the device and is the media that the device feeds if a specific media type is not selected Default Paper e Select Plain or Recycled for the paper type using the scroll bar e Select a paper color from the list shown using the scroll bar If the required color is not shown use the Other option 274 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Paper Substitution Enables the device to automatically substitute common US and metric paper gt lt Paper Substitution sizes when printing ee lf a Print Job requests a paper size thatis Replace 8 5 14 will substitute the 7 not available Nearest Match will replace following paper sizes if a Print Job Nearest Match is used to ie it with the paper size shown below requests Legal 8 5 x 14 paper and itis e t available automatically substitute the paper EN Disable Requested gt Replace
61. originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the More setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Less setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Auto Contrast to automatically set the contrast level depending on the original being scanned ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 61 Fax Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style of your faxed document To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Size Select Original Size to enter the size of Image Quality Reon Oo Book Faxing 0 O Reduce Split Reduce to Fit Original Size E Auto Detect your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection or Mixed Size Originals if scanning a mix of sizes The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensi
62. originals i Delete Last Segment The Build Job screen displays the first Le segment in the list The following options can be applied to any segment e Sample Last Segment produces a proof print of the last segment scanned The proof is delivered to the output module If you are satisfied with the proof you can continue programing the Build Job e Delete Last Segment deletes the last segment scanned You can continue programing the Build Job e Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen 42 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy 0 SS Job Assembly Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned After the last segment has been scanned select Print the Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed Sample Set When copying a large number of sets use the Sample Set feature to review a proof copy to ensure that all the print settings are correct before printing the remaining sets 1 2 Select the Sample Set button on the Job Assembly tab Select the On button and then select Save E Sample Job Load th e orl g als In th e docum ent This feature will print one complete sample of your job reflecting all Copy settings and hold printing the desired quantity
63. starting Rate capabilities of the receiving fax machine super G3 e This rate minimizes transmission Ei GE errors by using Error Correction Mode Di ES ECM Initial transmission speed is eters 33 600 Bits Per Second bps G3 14 4 Kbps e Selects the transmission rate based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine e Initial transmission speed is 14 400 Bits Per Second bps This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Forced 4800 bps e Used in areas of low quality communication when experiencing telephone noise or when fax connections are susceptible to errors e Forced 4800 bps is a slower transmission rate but is less susceptible to errors In some regional areas the use of Forced 4800 bps is restricted Select Save to save your selections and exit 66 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Fax Options Delay Send Select Delay Send to specify the time within the next 24 hours that you want the fax to be transmitted Use this feature to transmit faxes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone Delay Send can also be used with Mailbox and Polling options The options are Specified Time e Select Specified Time and select either the Hour or the Minute field to ideas ub enter a time to send your fax e Use the arrow buttons or numeric P keypad to enter the hours and specified Time minutes e Ifthe device is set up to display
64. this option to fix the image quality a E S problems on your device Print a test page EE and then analyse the output and choose Saloa ona ol ha eontre one of the options to fix the problem Hias Print Test Pages prints two cleaning pages followed by two test prints to Fix Options help you diagnose print issues 2 Light Lines fixes unexpected Light Lines fixes unexpected continuous lines of lighter colors or empty stripes continuous lines of lighter colors or yo visible on the printed output em pty stripes visible on the printed Sante Smears fixes streaks smudges and or ink spots of the same or different colors scattered over the printed output output Advanced Advanced list of expert routines Customer Service may direct you to enter this e Smears fixes streaks smudges and option ink spots of th e same or differ ent Please note prints within the Fix Image Quality feature will not be billed colors scattered over the printed output e Advanced provides a list of expert routines Customer Support may direct you to select this option 320 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Advanced Use this option to select a quick or full fix for the light line problems or fix the problem of ink smears Select the option required and then select Confirm when gt lt Fix Image Quality Light Lines Quick 90 Seconds temporarily fixes Fix ight lines now and schedules a full ligh
65. to sharpen the image Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Darken Pastel e Saturation controls the balance between vivid and pastel shades of the image Move the indicator towards Vivid for more saturated colors Move the indicator towards Pastel for less saturated colors Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by P image Enhancement 6 JL zc reducing the background or adjusting the x contrast The options are ad E e Background Suppression enhances off Manual Contrast originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output copy This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background EN Auto Suppression E Auto Contrast Normal e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the More setting to reproduce more vivid bla
66. to any type of fax machine that is connected to a telephone network Your images are sent from your device to a Third Party fax server which relays them over the telephone network to the fax number of your choice This means that your fax transmissions are controlled by the server which may limit your faxing options For example the server may be set up to collect and send all faxes at off peak times Most feature screens include these buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to a 9449 the values that were displayed when RightFax SEA the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen Instructions for sending a server fax and using the basic features are provided in ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How To Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features refer to Log In Out on page 92 80 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Dialing Options Dialing Options The dialing options enable you to enter the destination fax number or numbers Select the appropriate dialing option for your fax job To access the Dialing Options select Services Home and Server Fax Manual Dialing 1 Select the fax number field and enter the fax number requir
67. to print a configuration when the device is powered on or No to disable the option e Print Now prints the configuration report immediately Reset UI to Factory Settings This option resets all the control panel oand Rz lt lt kL Supplies Information touch screen settings back to their original state when the device was setup at the factory A confirmation screen is displayed select Reboot to continue with the reset and to reboot the device Select Cancel to exit without resetting the settings Interrupt Printing Enablement If this option is enabled jobs printing can be held in the job list for more urgent jobs to print e Enable instructs the device to allow jobs to be interrupted e Disable instructs the device not to allow jobs to be interrupted and held for more urgent jobs 284 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings The Service Settings are used to customize options which are specific to individual services such as Copy Fax or Print Copy Service Settings Select the Copy Service Settings option to access the following settings e Feature Defaults on page 285 e Edge Erase Presets on page 286 e Image Shift Presets on page 286 e Reduce Enlarge Presets on page 287 e Reading Order Options on page 287 e Auto Image Rotation on page 288 Feature Defaults Use to select the default settings for each programing feature within the Copy service such as paper suppl
68. tones without any text Color or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Map is used if your original is a map or contains intricate line art and text e Newspaper Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text How the Original was Produced e Printed Original is for originals that have come from a magazine book or newspaper or that have been printed on a large printing device e Photocopied Original is for originals that are photocopies e Photograph is for high quality photographic originals e Inkjet Original is for originals that have been produced using an inkjet printer e Solid Ink Original is for originals produced by a solid ink printing process such as output from this device 184 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail Scan Presets E mail Options Use Scan Presets to optimise scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents The options are e Sharing amp Printing is used for sharing files that are going to be viewed on screen and for printing most standard business documents This setting results in a small file size and normal image quality e Archival Small File Size is best for standard business documents that are stored electronically for record keeping purposes This setting results in the smallest
69. while you inspect the document feeder and program the job H You can then use the job controls on the Job Progress Monitor to release and print the req uirem ents 4 entire job or delete the entire job if the sample is unsatisfactory On Enter the total quantity required and press the Start button One copy set of the job the Sample Set is printed The Job Progress screen is displayed and the job is held in the Job List If the Sample Set is acceptable select Release The programed number of sets will be produced If the Sample Set is unacceptable select Delete and Delete Job to confirm Your job will be deleted from the list Note If the Job Progress screen is not displayed access your job by selecting the Job Status button Select the job in the list and select Release or Delete ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 43 Copy Job Assembly Save Current Settings Up to ten combinations of commonly used feature selections can be retained in the device memory as Saved Settings The device stores only the programing of the job NOT the image Each time Saved Settings are retrieved and used the image must be scanned To Save 1 Program the required job features 2 Select the Save Current Settings button on the Job Assembly tab 3 Select the Setting drop down menu and use the scroll bar to select an lt Available gt setting 4 Use the keyboard to enter a name for the saved settings 5 Select Save The se
70. 00 1 100 original EES e gg a uto peer eae e Select the Variable X Y buttons oran lt lt and use the numeric keypad or the arrow buttons to enter the Width Se X and Length Y ratios required m G e Use the Pre set X Y buttons to select 100 100 Auto Independent X Y or commonly used ratios which can be set up by your Administrator The selected X and Y ratios in percentages are shown next to the button together with an example application Use 100 100 to produce an image the same size as your original 12 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Copy Options Auto Independent X Y automatically fits the image of your original onto the paper you have selected The reduction or enlargement will not be proportional the device will distort the image so that it will fit onto the paper You must specify a paper tray before using this option Auto Center This option can be selected with either the Proportional or Independent options to position the image in the center of the paper selected Paper Supply On the Paper Supply section of the Copy tab you have the option to select a paper tray the paper size required or Auto Select Use More to access all the options e Auto Select automatically selects the appropriate paper size for each original based on the size of the original and any directly selected 9 E Ch Sa Auto Detect e Auto Select 1 1 Sided Collated rrr ES Copy Image Qua
71. 03 Copy Copy Options e 3 Staples 8x10 SEF 8 5x11 SEF 8 5x5 5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF 8 5x14 SEF B5 SEF Note SEF is Short Edge Feed and LEF is Long Edge Feed e Use the Original Orientation option to select the orientation of the originals being scanned Select Portrait or Landscape e Use the Paper Supply option to select the output media required To achieve some of the staple options the copy paper will need to be loaded in a specific orientation either Long Edge Feed LEF or Short Edge Feed SEF as shown in this table Output Tray Orientation Paper Size and Orientation A4 8 5x11 LEF LEF A4 8 5x11 Single Staple Top Left Output Required Original Orientation A4 8 5x11 SEF SEF A4 8 5x11 Single Staple Top Left A4 8 5x11 SEF SEF A4 8 5x11 Single Staple Bottom Left Note For some selections the device will rotate the image If you are unable to staple ensure that Image Rotation is On in Tools Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information Hole Punching If your device is equipped with one of the optional Hole Punch kits either 2 Hole 3 Hole 4 Hole Swedish 4 Hole or 2 Hole Legal Punch will be available e Hole punching can only be selected for A4 LEF Legal SEF and A3 8 5x11 LEF Legal SEF and 11x17 SEF paper and it can be combined with a stapling option if required e Each sheet will be punched individually so there is no limit to
72. 1 Suppressing Background 20 60 86 101 153 186 Suppression Background 154 T Template Image Settings 168 Template Creation 163 Template Deletion 163 Template Options 165 Templates 149 150 TIFF 106 159 Timers Settings 276 Tools Pathway 270 Total Impressions 224 Touch Screen 314 Transmission Defaults 291 Transmission Report 65 116 120 294 Transparency Separators 39 Tray Management Settings 274 Trays 238 Troubleshooting 315 Troubleshooting Settings 301 Turkey RoHS Regulation 335 Type of Original 100 Types of Original 58 84 151 U United States FCC Regulations 334 Update Templates Template Update 155 Usage Information 264 265 USB Port 212 352 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Index Using Saved Settings 45 V Valid Recipients 300 W Waste Ink Tray 312 WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC 343 Workflow Scanning 148 Templates 163 Workflow Scanning Service 148 Workflow Scanning Templates 149 X Xerox Customer Support Setting 273 Xerox Standard Accounting 299 XPS 159
73. 1 9302 9303 289 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Line 2 Setup If the Extended Fax option is installed the device can support two analogue fax lines This option enables you to set up Line 2 e Fax Number is the number of the phone line your system is attached to Enter the number for Line 2 using the numeric keypad e Line Name is a friendly name to logically identify the system Enter the name using the keyboard provided Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character or use Delete Text to delete the entire entry Select Save e Options determine whether the line is able to Send and Receive Send Only or Receive Only Select the required option for the fax line Incoming Fax Defaults This setting allows you to select the default options for incoming faxes x Incoming Fax Defaults Auto Answer Delay Auto Answer Delay e Ring Volume This setting allows you to set a time delay before the device responds to a call This is particularly useful if the device is attached to a shared telephone line e Enter the time delay required between 0 and 15 seconds Junk Fax Prevention This setting enables you to prevent the receipt of unwanted junk faxes This is done by only allowing the receipt of faxes from numbers held in the individual directory e Disabled switches off the Junk Fax Prevention option e Enabled allows faxes sent from numbers held in the individual directory to be received Pap
74. 20 196 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 179 E mail Introduction Introduction E mail is a standard feature that can be enabled If enabled it is selected by pressing the Services Home button then the E mail option Print From E mail enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document The scanned image is e mailed to the specified e mail recipient or recipients over the internet or Internet Fax intranet Using the E mail feature allows you to add and remove recipients and edit the subject line of the e mail message Most feature screens include these buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen Instructions for sending an e mail and using the basic features are provided in the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How To Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features refer to Log In Out on page 196 180 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail E mail Options These E mail options provide access to features which are required for programing basic e mail jobs Details such as the a Book Recipient Copy To
75. 220 Accessing Internet Services 221 222 NODS fas EE 20 ane 227 P WEE 228 eee ee EEN 229 Addres BOOK EE 230 ETI daore nE EREE EEA EEEE E E S E AEEA 231 0 0 A E 0000 0000 T E EEEE E E 232 Re EE 233 Paperand ale EE 235 at elef Te de WEE 238 TOV relate EE 239 Be EE 241 Thy ABYDOS sarraa rE 9020002000002000200 00304000 03 S 202 0 0 00 e esses 244 TAVO N WEE 245 RK 247 Storage and Handling 0 00 0000002002 0000220202 22 0100000000 22 MOCKING and Wee CEET 253 ak ELE EE o a ee ee ee ee ee 256 JOD CEET 257 Klee ee CEET 262 Administration and ACCOUNTING 0000707707 207 ele 0 00 0 270 DEVICE Settings EE 271 SENE NT EE 285 NIR eT SEUUINOS EE 296 ee eigene LEE 297 SOCUMCY ge Le EE 299 leien E e ai e BEER 301 General Care and 00 EE 305 Reg Le EE 308 GENIN ON Gl EE 310 leie E ee e DEE 315 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 5 Contents Further Assistance cc ccc ccc cee cee cence eee e eee eeeeceeueeeueeeceeeeenues 324 Seer Cle 9 es AE ebe dee 325 Notices and SOLELY 0020000000 00008 328 Safety Labels and Symbols 329 Operational Safety Information 330 EE 334 CODY REGUIGUIONS EE 336 FOX Re QUIGLIONS NEFERET SS 339 Maternal 200 000 ES EAEE ESATO 342 Product Recycling and Disposal lt 343 Energy Program Com
76. 302 9303 159 Workflow Scanning Filing Options e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu Depending on the receiving device the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi PDF A is an industry standard format for long term document preservation based on the PDF format The Advanced Settings may need checking to ensure they are appropriate for extended use e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu XPS XML Paper Specification is a new format supported by Windows Vista e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the men
77. 38 8 5x11 l T in the same orientation as the paper a SE Transparency 2 1 Sided More 5 More Update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections 3 Select the Output Format tab Special Pages button and then TR Special Pages Exceptions This feature controls how special pages are applied to your copied sets Covers can be blank or contain images They can also be printed on different paper than the rest of your job e Chapter Starts ensure a chapter begins on the right or left side of the Chapter page with a blank page inserted if needed Inserts are non imaged single or multiple pages that are placed into your copied sets Exceptions are pages that are imaged on different paper 4 Select the Page Number boxes and use the numeric keypad to enter the BR Exceptions page number or sequence of pages page Number Page per you want printed on different media fF 5 Select the Paper Supply button and select the tray that contains the Exceptions media Select Save to save your selection REG 6 Select the Add button to confirm your selections and add the programed Exceptions to the list on the right Add further Exceptions as required 7 Select Close to return to the Special Pages screen ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 33 Copy Output Format A list of the selected Special Pages is displayed on the screen To make changes select the item in the lis
78. 92 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail E mail Options e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu Depending on the receiving device the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi e PDF A is an industry standard format for long term document preservation based on the PDF format The Advanced Settings may need checking to ensure they are appropriate for extended use e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu e XPS XML Paper Specification is a new format supported by Windows Vista e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from
79. A4 or 8 5x11 LEF sized media can be loaded The media size and type requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted by the user Note Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded A CAUTION A problem may occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media 1 Opening the tray automatically lowers an elevator in the base of the tray 2 The media required is displayed on the screen Ensure the correct media is loaded 3 Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the left side of the tray e Load pre printed paper and labels face up and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the right edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 4 Close the paper tray When the tray is closed the elevator rises to feed the media ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 241 Paper and Media Tray 4 Bypass Tray 4 Bypass Tray 4 Bypass is a paper tray on the left hand side of your device and can be folded away when not in use It is primarily intended for use as a small quantity special materials feeder and accommodates media of all types including transparencies envelopes and tabs When media is detected in Tray 4 Bypass a paper settings screen is displayed The drop down menus are used to change the size type and color of the media loaded The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and th
80. Administration and Accounting 271 Device Settings e Scheduled wakes up and sleeps at set times on a daily basis Select Scheduled Settings to program the setting for each day e Activity is selected if the device is required to wake up when activity is detected e Time is selected if a specific Warm up Time and Energy Saver Time is required Select the time required for each option using the scroll bar e Fast Resume reduces the time taken to wake up This changes the default sleep low power timeouts and increases energy usage Date amp Time Some features and functions on the device require the local date and time such as Delayed Send or the Configuration sheet This utility enables you to set and change Wo cae the local date and time on the device oa e GMT Offset Time Zone Use this D ime option to set the difference between your local time and Greenwich Mean Time Enter the GMT Offset time between 12 0 and 14 0 hours using the arrow buttons e Date select the Format required and enter the Month Day and Year e Time enter the correct Hour and Minute and select PM or AM If a 24 hour clock is required select the Display 24 hour clock option and enter the Hour and Minute using the 24 hour clock format e Select Reboot to save and reboot the device or Cancel to exit without saving Date amp Time Language Keyboard Selection You can choose the default language used gt az ndo ance on the de
81. Darken Normal Auto Suppression Sharpness Normal Auto Contrast Image Options Image Options is used to change the appearance of the output image The options are Image Options Lighten Darken Lighten e Lighten Darken provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Move the indicator down to darken qe the image or up to lighten the image Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by Image Enhancement reducing the background or adjusting the contrast The options are d S e Background Suppression enhances ry originals that have colored 9 Auto Suppression e Auto Contrast lt Normal backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals 86 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Image Quality e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast
82. Inserter Orientation to match output Output Tray Orientation Media Types Media Types This section describes the different types of media which can be loaded in your device For further information about media types and specifications refer to www xerox com The Type can be selected from a drop down menu for the adjustable trays It is important to select the correct Type setting for the media loaded in each tray The device can detect different types of media as it travels through the paper path and will halt a job if a mismatch occurs The following media types are supported e Plain e Pre punched e Transparency e Pre Printed e Recycled Paper e Labels e Heavyweight e Extra Heavyweight e Pre Cut Tabs e Envelopes Plain This media type is used for plain and colored paper as well as lightweight card It is also the option used when loading carbonless paper The following paper types are not recommended e Coated papers e Conductive papers e Papers containing talc e Highly glossy paper e Papers containing wax stearate or plasticiser Pre Punched This media type is used for hole punched media which has two or more holes along one edge for use in ring binders and notebooks To ensure ink is not placed where the holes occur a small deletion is applied to the binding edge of the image e Load pre punched paper with the holes on the right edge in Trays 1 2 3 and Tray 6 Inserter ColorQube 9301
83. Mailbox Number between bt 001 and 200 3 Enter the Mailbox Passcode Mailbox Passcode 0000 9 Okc 4 Select Print All Documents to print P the contents of the mailbox Store to Local Delete Local Mailbox Documents The documents may be deleted after printing depending on the Mailbox amp Polling Policies set g s bep KF oa ec L es Wen Gs asa K 6 U 1 KE La Pa zk lt 4 nme KA Se l 22 Tia AIG CA 4 1 a A Te B rw 1 g LZ LK CU UOCE 4 6 S mW All the faxes stored in your mailbox can be deleted Local Mailbox Documents are W Mailboxes faxes you have stored ready for Polling and faxes that you have received in your mailbox 1 Select the Delete Local Mailbox Documents button Mailbox Number Off 001 0 Ae to Remote Ser Mailbox Mailbox Passcode 0000 9999 l Store to Local foo ale d L fy YIr inte Print Local Mailbox Documents 2 Enter the Mailbox Number between 001 and 200 3 Enter the Mailbox Passcode 4 Select Delete All Documents to delete the contents of the mailbox A confirmation screen is displayed select Delete All or Cancel Delete Local Mailbox Documents Ban emma Note The storage time for faxes is set up by the System Administrator ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 69 Fax Fax Options 5 A confirmation screen is displayed prior to deleting the faxes stored in the select
84. Pages Select the On button Select one of the arrow buttons to ee 9 determine the position of the Stored comment mra comment on the page Y Specify whether you want the p ee p comment to appear on All Pages All Pages Except First or First Page Only Use the scroll bar to browse the list of f Fz awr available comments and select the All Pages Except First comment you require ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 35 Copy Output Format 6 To add anew comment to the list highlight an empty entry and use the keyboard to enter up to 50 alpha numeric characters To edit an existing comment highlight the comment in the list and select the Edit button Use the keyboard to edit the entry and select Save to close the keyboard 7 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required 8 Program the Format amp Style options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 38 for instructions 9 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job Date Use the following instructions to add the Date 1 36 Select the Output Format tab Annotations button and then Date B Annotations EE Annotations will not be applied to Covers Front or Back Tabs Inserts Blank Chapter Start Pages Select the On button Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the position of the date on 2 the page EI 2008 A 6 Specify th
85. Regulations 334 Basic Scan to Home Options 174 Baud Rate 66 Billing 224 Billing Information 222 265 Black Impressions 222 265 Book Copying 24 Book Faxing 63 Booklet Creation 27 BPS Bits Per Second 66 Brightness 283 Broadcast Report 294 Build Job 42 73 91 109 162 167 L Calibration 320 Call for Service 324 Canada Regulations 334 Caring for your Device 310 312 CentreWare Internet Services SMart eSolutions 224 Chain Dial 54 Chapter Starts 29 Characters 60 86 Cleaning the Device 314 Cleaning the Document Glass 314 Cleaning the Touch Screen 314 Cleaning Unit 311 Clear All AC button 170 173 201 Color Balance 21 Color Impressions 222 265 Color Output 11 150 Color Presets 21 Configuration Report Setting 283 Confirmation Report 65 116 120 168 294 Constant Velocity Transport Glass CVT 314 Consumables Safety Information 332 Contacting Xerox 324 Contention Management Settings 279 Contrast 20 61 87 102 154 187 Convenience Stapler 18 Copy Feature Defaults 285 Copy Regulations 336 Copy Service 10 Copy Service Settings 285 Copy To 98 182 Copying Templates 163 Counters 222 265 Cover Sheet 56 Covers 29 Create New Folder 205 Creating a Private Folder 169 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 347 Index Creating Templates 163 Current Faults 317 Custom Original Size 62 89 105 157 167 Customer Replaceable Units 310 Cleaning Unit 311 Ink Stick
86. Remote Polling Local Polling Store for Local Polling Non Secure Polling Secure Polling Stored Local Documen ts Print All Delete All The Remote Polling feature allows you to retrieve a stored document from a remote machine where you call or Poll that machine Your device offers several ways of Polling another fax machine e Poll a Remote Fax retrieves a fax from a remote fax machine or machines immediately or at a specified time using Delay Send e Poll a Remote Mailbox retrieves a fax document from the mailbox of a remote fax machine The mailbox number and if applicable the passcode must be known Note If your device does not connect with the remote machine when Polling it redials the number If it does connect and then the transmission fails it does not redial the number and you have to start the Polling activity again Polling a remote machine is not available if the fax line is set to Send Only or Receive Only ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 71 Fax Fax Options Select the Remote Polling button The options are Poll a Remote Fax The Poll a Remote Fax feature allows you to call a remote fax machine The call locates and retrieves faxes stored at the remote machine Remote Polling allows you to poll a remote machine immediately or at a specified time More than one remote machine can be polled at a time 1 4 Select the Poll a Remote Fax button Enter the fax numbers of the devices w
87. System Administrator Guide Maintenance Assistant Maintenance Assistant monitors your device and notifies Xerox support services Geesse Set of potential issues It automates the a rer notification troubleshooting and repair ate ese process minimizing device downtime e Ifaproblem occurs you can use the Send Diagnostics Information to Xerox option to immediately send information to Xerox which will assist with troubleshooting activities e Use the Start an Online Troubleshooting session at www xerox com button to access the Xerox website for immediate advice on resolving device problems ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 225 Internet Services Status e Use the Download File to Your Computer button to save or view a CSV file containing detailed information about device usage and any problems which have occurred on your device gt Use the Refresh button to view the latest status information For information about configuring the Maintenance Assistant settings refer to the System Administrator Guide 226 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Jobs Jobs The Jobs option provides information about the all the incomplete jobs in the Job List on the device and the Saved Jobs Active Jobs Use this option to check the status of your job The Incomplete Jobs list displays a list of the current jobs and the status of each job Saved Jobs Jobs which have b
88. United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents POW ODUONS as2 62 662 5c2c 0s00e cde heb e eases ase deasae 308 PONG OR ance scsec eat eeeeees seca EREE ER 308 PONC gi a E E E AAEE T E Ea 308 Energy Save and Quick Restart 308 4 310 ITO ae EE 310 sais CI gt 2 0 311 GEST H Gro lad dic 0 EE 311 Emptying the Waste Ink Toy 312 Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container lt n nrnnnneeenno 313 Print Quality Maintenance e 313 Cleaning TASKS EE 314 TOUDI ROONG 2 0 000500000 315 the 315 0 0 EE EE Ce 315 A 316 Weld ee 317 PORE tee EEN 318 giie 200000000 A 318 Document Feeder Problems 319 Image Quality Problems 0 ccc cece eee eee 320 Statements vacteadGveseeeuseesyuess 6 R 321 Further Assistance chee etek ake obensbbenthuntensSbebe ese4e0dnd2asueeenaeoebess 324 Maintenance Assistant nnn nnnnnnnrnnnnnro n nnnrrnnrnssennns 324 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 7 General Care and Troubleshooting Power Options Power Options Power On e Press the Power On Off button The device begins the power on procedure e Some functions will b
89. User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 176 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents Rees Tan 1 52252620262 02000 00 EEE 180 Sne UE ed e 181 New Recipient 181 Stu KEE 182 HIE A E E AE A E 182 Add eS BOOK EEN 183 RI 7P e 183 EE 184 Big eil d Ke EE 184 DEON EE 185 Advanced Settings EEN 186 Image OPTIONS EEN 186 Mage Suite EEN 186 RESOIMUOM REEE 187 al EEN 188 189 Original 00 MER 189 TEE E ooo wien essen ees EE ee aos oe Ee 190 FOGG re soos 191 EMCO DONS 2 20 20 0 192 FHE el LEE 192 PING ere 192 VE KE Lei Cp Ke EE 194 JOD EE e EE 195 DUNG ee NEE 195 Beie O 022 200 2
90. a Address Book is allocated a 3 digit Speed Dial number shown next to the entry For Gen more information about the Address Book EE refer to Address Book on page 53 1 Select the Speed Dial option a tick is displayed 2 Select the fax number entry field ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 51 Fax Dialing Options 3 Enter the 3 digit speed dial number 4 Select Add to add the number to the Recipient List Enter additional numbers as required 5 Speed Dialing can be combined with Manual Dialing to build the recipient list Dialing Characters Additional dialing characters can be accessed by selecting the Dialing Characters button Use this option to enter the fax number if special characters are required To enter a fax number using the dialing characters 1 Select the Dialing Characters button Ee Dialing Characters 2 Use the numeric keypad to enter the number plus additional dialing Enter Fax number and press Add or Close characters The following characters are Character List available Dial Pause Pulse to Tone e Dial Pause use to pause ewe between numbers For additional lt 1 gt Line 1 lt 2 gt Line 2 pause time add multiple pauses Optional Readability Characters If you are using charge code Space numbers enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code number e Pulse to Tone use to switch between pulse and tone dialing e Mask Data use to protect
91. ackground on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 3 Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned image A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e 72 dpi recommended for output displayed on a computer It produces PER the smallest file size kd 100 dpi recommended for output 72 dpi 300 dpi Sa a quality for on screen viewing Smallest file size that delivers low quality text EI 100 dpi v 400 dpi Suitable for on screen viewing ony Print Qualiy will not be acceptable documents 150 dpi EI 600 dpi e 150 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics 200 dpi e 200 dpi recommended for average quali
92. ality To access the i anon Advanced Settings select Services Home 2 era CH E and Internet Fax Then select the Advanced Settings tab oe S Quality Normal File Size Small ngs Omage Options Dimage Enhancement Image Options Image Options is used to change the appearance of the output image The Tenes Spron e ae options are Lighten Darken e Lighten Darken provides manual SCH Se control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Move the indicator down to darken o the image or up to lighten the image e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images Move the indicator up to sharpen the image Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Darken k 4 Pastel e Saturation controls the balance between vivid and pastel shades of the image Move the indicator towards Vivid for more saturated colors Move the indicator towards Pastel for less saturated colors Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by P image Enhancement 9 reducing the background or adjusting the E contrast The options are H e Background Suppression enhances E o SS originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or KEE eliminating the background on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 101 Internet Fax
93. an view the list by using the scroll bar Preset Scan Areas mi w You are specifying the Credi area that will be Scan Area scanned e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure S eS the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis on a measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is 9 SS v Scan Areas scanned Custom a Scan Area Mized Sige Originals You are specifying the ares that will be e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different E Original Size size pages The pages must be the The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF EELER 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other EI Auto Detect me a combinations are shown on the 0 E screen The device will detect the size of the scan Ares documents and determine whether Originals the receiving fax machine can support the various paper sizes If the receiving fax cannot support the page sizes the image is reduced or enlarged to fit Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 89 Server Fax Fax Options Fax Options The Fax Options allow you to specify when Wa your fax document is transmitted To access the Fax Options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Fax el Options tab Image Quality Options Delay Send Delay Se
94. and 2 sl Renz EE completed job First split the originals into Geer with SE RES photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button E Build Job Segment 2 Select Display this window between segments to view the Build Job screen during scanning Then select Save l Segment 2 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the job E between segments Note The fax destination details must be entered prior to scanning R 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned SE T L After the last segment has been scanned select Submit the Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 91 Server Fax Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that servi
95. aper type for feeding heavyweight and card The maximum weight which can be fed is 216 gsm 56 lb Pre Cut Tabs Tabs are used as dividers in documents Your device can accommodate tabs with 1 to 10 tabs and weights of up to 200 gsm 53 lb e Donot use tabs with bent corners They can cause feeding related problems If a tab is bent remove it from the set and replace it with an undamaged tab in the same position e Tabs can only be loaded into Tray A Bypass gt The tabs must be loaded with the tab 1 on the top with the tab to the left e Use the Special Pages Inserts option in Copy or the Printer Driver to program inserts where the tabs are required Refer to the Copy or Print guide for information ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 Paper and Media Media Types Envelopes Printing on envelopes is available using Tray 4 Bypass only Envelopes should not be used in Trays 1 2 3 5 or 6 Inserter e Place the envelopes in Tray 4 Bypass face down e Envelopes must always be fed Short Edge Feed SEF e The flaps should ALWAYS be closed Flap edge should be to the left or towards the front Your device can feed the following types of envelopes Acceptable Types e Diamond Banker e Wallet e Business envelopes with diagonal seams e Baronial e Booklet Weight e Lightweight and medium weight Sizes e DL C5 C4 e Commercial 10 6x9 9x12 Acceptable Sealing e Gummed e Press and Seal
96. b Segment 2 Select Display this window between segments to view the Build Job screen during scanning Then select Save Segment 2 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the job E between segments Note The recipient details must be entered prior to scanning 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned SE T L After the last segment has been scanned select Submit the Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 195 E mail Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next but
97. be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ag ee eg e BEE 220 Accessing Internet Services 221 E 222 NV GIGOIMNG lee EE 222 Description amp Alerts 02 0520020 one reroror rrrrrore n 222 Billing INFOMATION NEE 222 eE 2 2 223 Sein Lett de EE 223 6 220 00 ETT 223 000000000 020200220 0000200004 0000 gt 224 DAT PAGES EE 224 SMart et Le EE 224 JODE 42120 220 0000000000 000000 ee 200020000 000 000000 227 0 CEET 227 0 100 00220200 227 PNE eege 228 6 ME 229 e EE 230 ien dE 231 SUDDONG 00 EE E 232 EIT 233 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 219 Internet Services Introduction Introduction Internet Services uses the embedded HTTP Server on the device This allows you to communicate with the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 through a web browser and gives you access to the Internet or Intranet Entering the IP Address of the device as the URL Universal Resource Locator in the browser provides direct access to the device Internet Services enables users to perform many functions including e Checking machine status billing information and consumable status e Submitting print jobs over the internet or intranet e Set up the Public Address Book by importing an existing address book or by adding entries individually e Creating modifying and deleting Workflow Scanning templates e Customize the device settings suc
98. been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 46 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpubli
99. book using this option or you can import a comma separate value CSV file Windows only You can store up to 1 000 entries phonebook Shared Phonebook shows the location of a shared phonebook which is accessed by many users and is typically located on a network server You can copy information from the shared phonebook to a personal phonebook but shared phonebooks are generally set to read only mode Shared LDAP Phonebook shows the location of a shared LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol phonebook if enabled LDAP is a protocol that is often used for corporate address books This phonebook is located on a network server and accessed by many users You can copy information from the LDAP phonebook to a personal phonebook To access an LDAP phonebook bi directional communication must be configured in the print driver You can specify the location of your company phone book in the Shared LDAP Phonebook window Your company phonebook will then be available on the Add From Phonebook screen User Preferences Select the User Preferences required 118 Prompt When Adding Duplicate Recipients provides a warning if the same recipient is added twice Prompt When Removing a Recipient provides a warning if deleting a recipient from the phonebook Always Use Current Recipient List is used if you always send faxes to the same recipients This option eliminates the need to create a recipient list each time you send a fax Always Use Curr
100. bs Completed Jobs JobStatus doc E Printing BTVu MachineStatus doc A Held Je delete JobStatus doc A Hed Special doc A Held Special doc A Held Special doc A Held Cvillone Active Jobs All Jobs P Release Job JobStatus doc Completed Jobs Job Owner BTVu Enter your Secure Print Passcode to print JobStatus doc eis vg E Sp code they will all be released for printing ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status 261 Machine Status Machine Status Machine Status provides information about the device the status of the paper trays consumables and any current faults Usage counters are also available Machine Information Machine Information provides general Machine rh e H c 2 Information information information about the device such as the General Information device model serial number and software customer support Paper Tray hp www xerox com mk version Informati Device Model Pages It also provides options for access status ColorQube 9303 information about the paper trays and Machine Seral Number zg stated BRE123456N ptions consumables System Software Version Maintenance 061 180 100 18590 Assistant Further information can be printed about the device options and a list of the installed services and solutions is available Service Code 3 Paper Tray Status SR y Paper Tray Status Information about each of the trays Full Pap
101. business documents This setting results in a small file size and normal image quality e Archival Small File Size is best for standard business documents that are stored electronically for record keeping purposes This setting results in the smallest file sizes and normal image quality Workflow Scanning 55 All Templates are gt defaultTemplate Layout Adjustment A T Sharing amp Printing Details for defaultTemplate e S Archival FAX Destination configured Small FileSize w High Quality ZTE Printing gh Simple Scan bura 9 8 Output Color ar rigina Auto Detect e OCR is best for documents that are going to be processed by Optical Character Recognition OCR software This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e High Quality Printing is best for business documents containing detailed graphics and photos This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e Simple Scan is used for faster processing but may result in excessively large file sizes Using this setting applies only minimal image processing and compression e View Details is used to access all the Scan Presets options available If using this option select Save to save your selections and exit 152 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access 10 Ki ee Se E Scanning Settings Adjustmen
102. cally to the Top Tray System generated reports are sent to the Top Tray automatically The following options are available for Copy Print and Fax jobs Stacker Tray Copy Le Fax Top Tray e Top Tray delivers the output to the Top tray e Stacker Tray delivers the specified job output to the Stacker Tray Within Job Offsetting The device offsets every set from the previous set making it easier to separate the sets There maybe occasions when you require the job to stack without offsetting Use this feature to enable or disable the offsetting e Enable instructs the device to offset each printed set e Disable instructs the device to stack the sets without offsetting Staple Productivity Productivity can be improved by stapling long edge feed LEF documents in the top right corner e Enable instructs the device to staple LEF documents in the top right corner e Disable instructs the device to staple LEF documents in the top left corner Supplies Select the Supplies option to access the es SE following settings e Enter PagePack Passcode Device Settings Supplies Low Supply Warning on page 281 Es Enter PagePack Passcode Es Low Supply Warning e Supply Counter Reset on page 281 Accounting Settings 6 Supply Counter Reset 280 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Enter PagePack Passcode This option is used to set
103. can focus on black and white or colors during scanning This option allows you to customize the bias based on the type of originals being scanned and the output required e Select the bias towards color or monochrome for scanning using the document glass Device Settings a Supplies Billing Information 1 Input Features Auto Color Detection Photo Text Settings 7 N Auto Color Detection Scan From Document Glass Bias to Color Bias to Monochrome Scan From Document Feeder Bias to Color Bias to Monochrome e Select the bias towards color or monochrome for the document feeder Photo Text Settings When the Photo amp Text option is being used the device can be customized to enhance the photo or the text depending on requirements e Select Bias Photo if the photo quality is more important e Select Bias Text to enhance the text quality 278 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting N Photo Text Settings Bias Photo Normal Bias Text E Device Settings Output Select the Output option to access the following settings e Contention Management on page 279 e Out of Staples Options on page 279 e Output Location on page 280 e Within Job Offsetting on page 280 e Staple Productivity on page 280 Contention Management The device is capable of processing several jobs at the same time such as scanning s
104. ce 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 92 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Version 1 0 Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permiss
105. ce to choose a suitable paper supply e 2 Sided Printing use to select 1 or 2 sided output or select Auto for the device to choose an __d Paper Supply Z 2Sided Printing d Finishing appropriate option St erg jan e Finishing use to select a specific finishing option for the output or select Auto for the device to choose an appropriate option Select the Quantity box and enter the number of copies required using the numeric keypad Press Start to print the job If the job is a secure job enter the passcode required and select Print Job The Job Progress screen is displayed Select Job Status to view status information or use Program Next Job to run a different job If using a USB Flash Drive remove it from the USB port when you have finished printing ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 201 Print From Using Print From Using Internet Services You can reprint your saved jobs using Internet Services 1 2 202 Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is S 192 168 100 100 enter the following XEROX ColorQube 9303 into the URL field K aaia RRE RRE http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page x 6 Fa 7 Sameh ip Faerie gi H3 5 0 The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration
106. ch as a PDF or PostScript file To access Internet Services de 2 204 Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For ype Saath Ei example If the IP Address is Sree 192 168 100 100 enter the following i ec i a XEROX ColorQube 9303 http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions Select Print to access the Job Submission options Job Submission Submit Job Clear Enter the file name of the job Fie Nae requiring saving or use the Browse option to locate the file Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Save Job for Reprint The Saved Job options are displayed e Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print to store and print the job e Job Name is used to enter a name for the job e Folder is used to select a location to store the job The Default Public Folder is available to all users other folders may have restricted access e Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to the job The job can only be accessed and printed using the passcode entered here e Program the Paper 2 Sided Printing Output Color Collate Orientation Staple and Output Destination as required Select Submit Job a
107. chineStatus doc A Held Secure Print Active Jobs Completed Jobs BTVu H JobStatus doc A Held Secure Print Delete GKern 5 Special doc A Held Resources Required Job Progress GKern Special doc A Held Pay For Print Ae ANS GKern Special doc 4 Held for Multiple Reasons lt Close Menu 258 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status Job Status Select Completed Jobs Lei SES Cen The list of completed jobs is displayed Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the jobs in the list Mjudd H VISO_document vsd GA Completed Local User Copy 120 A Completed Local User KI Internet Fax Send 10 A Completed With Errors Ravioli aa Report Job 894 P Completed Ravioli DA E mail 333 Completed Ravioli Network Scan 345 G Completed To view the details of a completed job select the job ES Job Details VISO document vsd The job details are displayed Select Close to exit the Job Details screen Job Type Copy Status Processing Owner Local User Immediate Overwrite Disabled Number of Images 0 Output Sheets 0 Completed Jobs Select All Jobs to filter the jobs and Lie Ss display only Copy Print and Fax Received Jobs or Scan Jobs and Fax ae I Sent Jobs that have been completed All Jobs T j i tvsd ef Completed Copy Print and Fax Received Jobs vs y Comple Scan Jobs and Fax Sent Jobs G Completed Local User Internet Fax Send 10 GA Completed With Errors
108. cify a time to send the fax using the Send Time option The Preferences button enables the user to customize the settings that are displayed when the Fax from PC feature is used to make it quicker and easier to send your fax 114 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC Faxing trom a PC Faxing from a PC To fax your job the fax option must be installed on your printer and fax must be enabled in the Installable Options screen 1 Select or create a document on your PC With your document open in your application select Print then select your ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 printer If the printer is not available in the menu it may have not been installed correctly contact your System Administrator for advice Select the Properties button to display the print driver printing preferences Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open This screen displays the recipients for the current fax You can now Add Fax Recipients or Add From Phonebook To add a new recipient select the Add Recipient button Input the name and fax number of the recipient Complete the additional information Select the Save to Personal Phonebook option if you want to add the recipient to your Personal Phonebook A4 210 EE mm Color Automatically Select Type Automatically Select Saved Settings Driver Defaults sd Cancel Apply Pre
109. cks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Less setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original e Select Auto Contrast to automatically set the contrast level depending on the original being scanned 20 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Color Presets Color Presets provides options for enhancing the quality of your color copies L color Presets Selecting a color preset option optimises all the image quality features The options EN off are Lively e Lively increases the depth of color of your copies Bright Warm Cool e Bright increases the lightness of your copies e Warm brings out the red tones in the output e Cool brings out the blue tones in the output Color Balance Color Balance enables you to adjust the balance between individual colors and the peeves overall amount of color on the copies The options are e Normal leaves the color the same as EI Ke the original e Basic Color adjusts the individual density levels for each of the four a process colors yellow magenta cyan and black Move the indicator up the scale for increased density and down the scale for less density for each color bh Image Quality e Advanced Color adjusts the highlight mid tone and shadow density levels in each of the four process colors Select a process color and move the indicator up the scale for increased den
110. confidential information For example if a special charge code or credit card number is required for a call simply use the Mask Data character Select the character before entering confidential numbers After the last confidential numbers select again to turn the mask data off Characters between the symbols will appear as e Wait for Dial Tone suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service e Optional Readability Characters Space these are used for readability purposes but do not affect the number entered For example if you wish to identify the area code of a fax number use the Readability Characters 1234 567890 If more than one fax line is available the following characters are also available e Line 1 gt 1 lt selects line 1 to dial the number Using the line selection identifier temporarily overwrites the fax settings and is for the current job only e Line 2 gt 2 lt selects line 2 to dial the number Using the line selection identifier temporarily overwrites the fax settings and is for the current job only If an incorrect entry is made use the left right arrows to navigate through the number and use the C button to delete a character Use Clear Text to delete all the characters 3 When you have entered the fax number and dialing characters required select Add to add the number to the recipient
111. ct options required for the folder The folder can be deleted by selecting the Delete Folders button The folder and the contents of the folder are deleted from the list on this screen and the list of available folders at the device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is 28 j enabled the user will also have ff fem Oo e to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details e If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID e If aForeign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display To log out select the Log In Out E ar button again or se
112. ct the entry required and select Add to Group John Doe Sou To add a group entry to the new Allen Iverson 569 2222 group select Group from the drop Steve Nash 569 3333 down menu Select the group entry required and select Add to Group 7 Continue adding individuals and Speed Dial Name Fax Number Group 004 Recipients groups until all the recipients have been added To delete entries from the Group use Remove or Remove All 8 Select Save when you have finished adding recipients The recipients display in the list 9 Select Close to return to the Address Book screen The new Group has been created 10 To amend a Group entry select the Edit Details option To delete a Group use the Clear Entry option Cover Sheet The Cover Sheet feature attaches a cover sheet to the document being transmitted This replaces the routine of manually sending a cover sheet each time you send a document The Cover Sheet includes the following information 56 To the recipients name can be entered at the device From the sender s name as entered at the device Comment the comment as specified from the comment list Start Time the date and time of the fax transmission Depending on the setup the time is displayed as a 12 or 24 hour clock This information is added automatically to the cover sheet Pages the page count excluding the cover page This information is added automatically to the c
113. customer documentation for this procedure Country codes should be set prior to connecting this product to the network Note Although this product can use either loop disconnect pulse or DTMF tone signaling it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup Modification of this product connection to external control software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox will invalidate its certification South Africa This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 341 Safety and Regulations Material Safety Data Material Safety Data For Material Safety Data information regarding your printer go to North America www xerox com msds European Union www xerox com environment_europe For the Customer Support Center phone numbers go to www xerox com office worldcontacts 342 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Product Recycling and Disposal Product Recycling and Disposal USA amp Canada Xerox operates a worldwide equipment take back and reuse recycle program Contact your Xerox sales representative 1 800 ASK XEROX to determine whether this Xerox product is part of the program For more information about Xerox environmental programs visit www xerox com environment html If you are managing the disposal of your Xerox product please note that the product may contain lead
114. d check the status of your job Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for more information The scanned images are filed to the location specified on the template ready for retrieval by the user ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 175 Workflow Scanning Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the
115. d job First split the originals into Geer with SE RES photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button E Build Job Segment 2 Select Display this window between segments to view the Build Job screen during scanning Then select Save l Segment 2 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the job E between segments Note The recipient details must be entered prior to scanning 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned SE T L After the last segment has been scanned select Submit the Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 109 Internet Fax Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the
116. d size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other combinations are shown on the screen Select Save to save your selections and exit Sa Original Size Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas You are specifying the Credi area that will be Scan Area scanned Mixed Size Originals ey Original Size oe Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custom su Scan Area are specifying the Va ir fou Mixed Size Pm area that will be Originals i scanned G Original Size The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed in the feeder and processed at the same time Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custom Scan Area Mixed Size Originals ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 105 Internet Fax Internet Fax Options Internet Fax Options The Internet Fax Options allow you to om re reen erres Ka temporarily change the format of the S
117. d text Font Point Size which determines the size of all the annotation options used on your copy output Use the scroll bar to browse the list of font colors and select the one you require Select the Side 2 Options from the following selections Same as Side 1 settings chosen will apply to both Side 1 and Side 2 of your output Mirror Side 1 Flip on Horizontal output will open from right to left like a book with the binding edge on the left The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 For example if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of Side 1 it will appear in the bottom right corner of Side 2 Mirror Side 1 Flip on Vertical output will open from bottom to top like a calendar with the binding edge at the top The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 For example if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of Side 1 it will appear in the bottom right corner of Side 2 Select Save to save your annotation Format amp Style options Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Transparency Separators Output Format Use Transparency Separators to interleave each printed transparency with a blank sheet of paper from a specified paper tray 1 Load the transparencies into Tray A Bypass update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections Refer to the Paper and Media guide for loading instructions
118. dd a brief message To access the E mail el Ke Options select Services Home and E mail Then select the E mail Options tab LJ Reply To lt markjudd xerox com File Name This feature enables you to name the file that is sent by E mail e Using the keyboard enter the name of the file EE File Name e Upto 40 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards e Select Save to save your selections and exit File Format The File Format determines the type of file created You can select the file format you wish to use for your scanned image The options are e PDF Portable Document Format allows recipients with the right 9 Fite Format software to view print or edit the e fe ae cae Portable Document Format PDF mail File No matter what their er e el Best suited for Sharing editing searching and printing documents computer platform PDF A Searchable Searchable This file will be run through an Optical Character e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified Recognition OCR process This could take a few PS minutes It will allow the text in the resulting file to be searchable and editable Multi Page TIFF TIFF 1 File per Page Document K Language 1 File per Page English 1
119. de Default Output Options If your device is fitted with a finisher you are able to staple 2 hole punch or 2 side your incoming faxes This utility is used to specify the output options you require for all your incoming faxes e Staple staples all incoming fax output if enabled e Hole Punch prints all incoming faxes on 2 hole punched media if enabled e 2 Sided prints all incoming faxes 2 sided if enabled Transmission Defaults Use these options to set the fax sending Se Transmission Defaults Close defaults Automatic Redial Setup Automatic Resend we Audio Line Monitor Automatic Redial Setup Send Header Text m Batch Send If the device cannot make contact with the destination fax machine it automatically waits and redials later Use this setting to specify the interval between unsuccessful attempts and the number of times the device redials e Redial Time Interval is used to specify the time interval between redials for a failed transmission Between 1 and 25 minutes can be entered e Automatic Redial Attempts instructs the device how many times to redial the remote fax machine before rejecting the job Between 0 and 14 attempts can be entered ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 291 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Automatic Resend If the device connects to the receiving fax machine but the fax transmission is unsuccessful the device automatically attempts to resend the fax Use this settin
120. de 2 of the front or back cover sheet Note If Front amp Back Same is selected the same programing options are applied to the Front and Back cover 6 Select the paper tray that contains the cover media 7 Select Close to return to the Special Pages screen A list of the selected Special Pages is displayed on the screen To make changes select the item in the list you wish to change and use Edit Use Delete or Delete All to delete unwanted entries Select Close Menu to exit from the drop down menu 8 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job 30 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format Chapter Starts Use the following instructions to program Chapter Starts 1 Onthe Copy tab select the paper you Ho Dee a ee ee y Adjustment utput Format 0 ssembi want to use the job Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output Note Special Pages is not available if 6 is 75 Auto Paper is selected 0 EN Auto Select Deere collated 1E A4 Black White d Plain 1 2 Sided Gei oan 211x17 1 Staple More Wo 2 2 Sided ee E Reduce Pa g 38 8 5x11 Transparency 2 1 Sided More Folding Rotate Side 2 More More K LN 2 Select the Output Format tab Special Pages button and then TR special Pages Chapter Starts This feature controls how special pages are applied to your copied sets Covers can be blank or contain images They can also be p
121. designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency examination approval and compliance with established environmental standards To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox equipment follow these safety guidelines at all times Electrical Supply This section provides important electrical supply safety information that you should read before installing or using the device Read the information in the following sections e Power Outlet Electrical Safety on page 330 e Power Cord Electrical Safety on page 330 e Equipment Safety on page 331 e Emergency Power Off on page 332 e Disconnect Device on page 332 Power Outlet Electrical Safety This equipment must be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the data plate label located on the rear cover of the equipment If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements please consult your local power company or a licensed electrician for advice The electrical supply outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible AY WARNING This equipment must be connected to a protective earth circuit This equipment is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will only fit into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet Always connect equipment to a corr
122. displayed identifying the media that should be loaded in the tray If the wrong size of media is loaded or the tray guides are set incorrectly the device gives a warning to adjust the guides Note Only the System Administrator can change the media attributes for a dedicated tray If a non standard size media is loaded or the tray guides are set incorrectly the device displays a screen showing Unknown size and asking you to confirm or change the settings If set to Adjustable the following media can be loaded in Trays 1 and 2 Up to 550 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Media sizes in the range A5 SEF to A3 SEF 5 5x8 5 SEF to 11x17 SEF Media types e Bond standard or recycled paper e Card e Pre printed media e Labels e Hole punched paper e Carbonless paper Trays 1 and 2 must not be used to feed transparencies envelopes or tabs Tray 4 Bypass Tray can be used for these media types Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower then specified ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 239 Paper and Media Trays 1 and 2 Loading Trays 1 and 2 If Tray 1 or Tray 2 is set as a Dedicated tray the media requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted A CAUTION A problem will occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media Do not open Tray 1 if Tray 2 is open 1 Open the tray 2 Place the media in the tray Media must be position
123. documents Use this option to select a Landscape image orientation Originals can be fed in any orientation Select Save to save your selections and exit 156 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Original Size Layout Adjustment Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other combinations are shown on the screen Select Save to save your selections and exit ea Original Size v Auto Detect ey Original Siz Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custom E Scan Area Mixed Size Originals You are specifying the area that will be scanned EN G Original Size Auto Detect Preset Scan Area
124. e Gamera RRR TRR brea atest Pg Chobe Fean been ere j Poa tg coon 5 proceed RN the dec Once you have reviewed this page it can be switched off using the Don t Show Welcome Page again option Description amp Alerts A description of any problems or Alerts on Sean Address Nook Proper the device ys information Paget SMart eSclutiors Machine Model Name Xerox ColorQube 9303 NREOOOCAADCSOLS Location Addrese mochre location rot set 3 210 229 116 Status IPv6 Address Link Local Alert Machine Needs Attention fe 0 200 neff fese 9019 64 Bypete Uter eterverton itr er interface to confit Tray 4 eetenge Arint and Copy eervices caa cormtirwe if the correct paper s available in other trays he Occuement Feeder is raced User iferventoo a requred to lower the Documer coder Al machine 46109063 ote Kr 6 Billing Information Provides the device serial number the a tg et e eg number of black impressions and the number of color impressions made cera Machine Sera umber pn en Funnier Black Color Level 1 tingpreisiona a Color Level 3 Impressions EI Color Level 3 Impressions Total Impresi ns 222 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Usage Counters Provides more detailed information on device usage such as number of copied sheets number of printed sheets
125. e Authorization Use this option to setup the deletion rights for authenticated users Job Deletion Security Settings Machine information Faults io Service Settings Network Settings Billing Information Authorization Image Overwrite Security a IP Sec QE Valid Recipients Accounting Settings Security Settings Troubleshooting l Use this option to set which users are authorized to delete jobs from the device Options available are All Users or System Administrator Only Image Overwrite Security Image Overwrite If you have sent print jobs to the device that are confidential or sensitive you can setup the device to automatically remove any data stored on the hard disk after the job has been printed Select Enable to enable the Image Overwrite activity after each job On Demand Overwrite If you have sent print jobs to the device that are confidential or sensitive you can delete any data that is stored on the hard disk after the job has been printed This is done using the On Demand Overwrite option There are two types of Overwrite available Standard or Full Standard Overwrite takes approximately 20 minutes and excludes e Print file directories e Scan to mailbox jobs e Fax dial directories e Mailbox contents x On Demand Overwrite Image data from memory and hard disk s will be overwritten y 4 Full Standard will take approximately 20
126. e All Templates allows you to identify lt and select all the scanning templates e or workflows that are available on the faria Berme L oto amp Text aring amp Printing device Use the scroll buttons to browse through the list and select a scanning template for use Public Private Templates e Local Templates displays the basic scanning templates that have been created using the options provided by the device e Network Templates displays advanced network scanning templates and workflows which have been created using optional scanning applications e Scan to Home Templates are available if you have entered your login details into the device Images are scanned to a specific area for each user e Public Private Templates displays private or public access templates setup by the System Administrator e USB Template this is used to store your scanned images on a USB Flash Drive The USB Flash Drive is specified as the filing location on this template If this template is selected and a USB Flash Drive has not been inserted a message is displayed Output Color Select Output Color to automatically detect and match the color of your original or produce monotone full color or a single color output from your original The options are e Auto Detect to select output that a Gan 24 Scanning Settings Adjustment Options Assembly matches your original Details for defaultTemplate n Black amp Wh
127. e Defaults 288 Fax from PC 114 Fax Mailboxes 68 Fax Numbers 51 Server Fax 81 Fax Protocol Report 303 Fax Regulations 339 Fax Service 50 Fax Setup 288 Fax Setup Options 283 Faxing From aPC 115 Faxing from Books 63 FCC Regulations 334 Feature Defaults Copy 285 Fax 288 File Format 106 159 File Name 159 File Size 103 155 167 File Storage 148 Filename Duplication 160 Filing Destination 165 Filing Destinations 161 Filing Options 167 Filing Policy 165 Finishing Devices 17 Finishing Problems 318 Folding 15 Forced 4800 66 Foreign Interface Device 299 From 98 182 Further Assistance 324 G General Care 310 Group Fax Number 55 H Handling Paper Stock 318 Health amp Safety Contact Information 346 Hole Punch Waste 313 Hole Punching 15 Home Template 173 I Identifying Problems 315 If File Already Exists 160 Image Count 222 265 Image Erase 158 167 Image Options 60 101 153 167 Image Overwrite Setup 299 Image Quality Problems 320 Image Settings 168 Image Shift 25 Impressions Count 222 265 Individual Fax Number 54 82 Information 262 Information Pages 224 Ink Sticks 310 Ink Tray 312 Ink Usage 264 Input Option Settings 278 Inserts 29 Internet Fax 96 Internet Fax Service 96 Internet Services 221 Address Book 230 Billing 222 Jobs 227 Print 228 Properties 231 Saved Jobs 227 Scan 229 Status 222 Interrupt Printing Enablement 284 Inver
128. e date format by selecting BEG De DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY or vm YYYY MM DD 2005 1 1 Specify whether you want the date to appear on All Pages All Pages Except First or First Page Only Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required Program the Format amp Style options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 38 for instructions Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format Bates Stamp Use the following instructions to program a Bates Stamp 1 Select the Output Format tab Annotations button and then Bates Annotations Stamp RE Annotations will not be applied to Covers Front or Back an Inse ds Chapter Start Pages Comment 2 Select the On button 3 Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the position of the Bates Stamp on the page gt or bees f 4 Select the Starting Page Number box KT ee mM o 7 and use the numeric keypad to enter Ko a starting page number Leading ages zeros may be entered to set the starting page number length for example 000000001 5 Specify whether you want the Bates Stamp to appear on All Pages or All Pages Except First A Bates Stamp 6 Use the scroll bar to browse the list of available prefixes and select the one you require To adda new prefix to the list highlight a
129. e device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non standard media size is used The following media can be loaded in Tray 4 Bypass Up to 100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Media sizes in the range A5 SEF to SRA3 SEF 5 5x8 5 SEF to 12x18 SEF Envelopes sizes DL to C4 10 to 9x12 all envelopes must be fed Short Edge Feed SEF Media types e Bond standard or recycled paper e Card e Pre printed media e Labels e Transparencies e Hole punched paper e Carbonless paper e Tabs e Envelopes Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower then specified Loading Tray 4 Bypass Your device alerts you if Tray 4 Bypass is selected for a job and the media requested does not match the media currently loaded It also warns you if the tray runs out of paper during a job 1 242 Make sure the tray is in the down position For larger media use the tray extension Place the media on the tray Locate the media to the right edge e Load pre printed paper and labels face down and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left e Load transparencies face down with the white strip on the left For information about loading tabs refer to Pre Cut Tabs on page 249 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Tray 4 Bypass Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line Mak
130. e message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges In order to program this information into your machine refer to customer documentation and follow the steps provided Data Coupler Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ T XXX X If requested this number must be provided to the Telephone Company A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C using the compliant telephone line cord with modular plugs provided with the installation kit See installation instructions for details The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line E
131. e ready before others The device will be ready to scan in approximately 3 minutes Power Off e Press the Power On Off button A confirmation screen will appear e Select Power Down to commence the power down cycle If power down is no longer required select Cancel to return to the previous screen If power down is selected the device remains on for approximately 30 seconds before the power is terminated Any jobs in the job list will be deleted Ensure you wait at least 30 seconds before powering on again e If Cancel is selected the power down option will be cancelled and the device will be available for use Note It is recommended the device is only powered off if a problem occurs or if it is being moved Use the power save function to conserve energy during periods of inactivity If the device is being moved allow the device to cool down for 30 minutes before moving it A WARNING Use only the ON OFF switch to reboot your device Damage may occur to your device if power is removed by other means Energy Save and Quick Restart The Energy Save button on the control panel can be used for additional power functions e Select the Energy Save button e If Energy Saver is selected the device will immediately enter the Power Saver Mode appropriate to its configuration If there are any jobs in the job list a second screen is displayed To re activate the device when in this mode touch a button on the touch screen or contro
132. e shift to the outer pages of the booklet Specify how much the page images are shifted outward in 10ths of a point Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be stapled punched or folded Refer to www xerox com for specifications information If your document is already formatted as a booklet do not select Booklet Layout Page Layout Options If the orientation is not already set in your application select the orientation from the first drop down menu e Portrait prints the text and images across the shortest dimension of the paper e Landscape prints the text and images across the longest dimension of the paper e Rotated Landscape places the landscape text and image upside down rotates the text and image 180 degrees Select the sides printed option required from the second drop down menu e 1 Sided Print prints on one side of the paper or transparency Use this option when printing on transparencies envelopes or labels e 2 Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound on the long edge of the sheet e 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints on both sides of a sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound on the short edge of the sheet Note You can also select these options on the Paper Output tab for 2 Sided Printing If you select multiple pages per sheet for Pages Per Sheet or Booklet Layout select one of the following options from the th
133. e sure that the guides just touch the paper The paper settings for the tray are displayed on the touch screen The tray detects the position of the side guide to determine the size of the media Confirm or change the settings as required ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 243 Paper and Media Tray 5 Tray 5 Tray 5 is an optional high capacity paper source When installed Tray 5 takes priority as the primary paper feeder This tray is a dedicated tray and as standard feeds A4 or 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed LEF media Additional kits can be purchased and enable the tray to take either A4 8 5x11 or 8 5 x 14 Short Edge Feed SEF or A3 or 11x17 SEF The following media can be loaded in Tray 5 Up to 4000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper A4 or 8 5x11 LEF up to 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 b paper additional kits Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Media types e Bond standard or recycled paper e Card e Pre printed media e Hole punched paper Tray 5 must not be used to feed labels transparencies envelopes tabs or carbonless paper Tray 4 Bypass can be used for these media types Loading Tray 5 The media size and type requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted by the user Note Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded A CAUTION A problem may occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media 1 244 Press the button to o
134. e the appearance and style of your copy jobs For example you can add covers or annotations create booklets combine Output Format several images onto one page and E ransparenc eparators page Layout S x Pages per Side 0 interleave transparencies 28 Repeat mage off Booklet Creation Booklet Creation enables the production of booklets from 1 or 2 sided originals The device will scan your originals and automatically reduce and arrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected copy paper so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half A cover can be inserted onto the booklet automatically by selecting the Special Pages option from the Output Format tab If your device is fitted with the High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker you can use the Booklet Creation gt lt feature to automatically produce folded and stapled booklets The following Booklet Maker specifications apply e Paper Sizes A3 11x17 A4 8 5x11 8 5x13 and 8 5x14 e All media must be Short Edge Feed SEF e Booklet thickness e For Folded and Stapled booklets a maximum of 15 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 13 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 160 gsm 43 lb e For Folded Only booklets a maximum of 5 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 3 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 200 gsm 53 lb Re
135. e this equipment where people might step on or trip on the power cord e This equipment should not be placed in a room unless proper ventilation is provided Please contact your local Authorized dealer for further information ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 331 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Emergency Power Off If any of the following conditions occur turn off the equipment immediately and disconnect the power cable s from the electrical outlet s Contact an authorized Xerox Service Representative to correct the problem e The equipment emits unusual odors or makes unusual noises e The power cable is damaged or frayed e A wall panel circuit breaker fuse or other safety device has been tripped e Liquid is spilled into the machine gt The machine is exposed to water e Any part of the equipment is damaged Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug in device To remove all electrical power from the equipment disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet Maintenance Information A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the user documentation supplied with the product e Do not carry out any maintenance on this product which is not described in the cu
136. e using Internet Services 1 To copy a template select the Internet Services Scan option Diest ribin 2 Select the required template from the list on the left of the screen 3 Select the Copy button Desen morai erz pp Caner 4 Enter the new template name andthe mn Ra New Distribution Template Copy template description and owner if regen a required L KEES female eran Detten Optional Gener If the name is not changed Copy is appended to the template name 5 Select Add An exact copy of the original template is displayed with the new name 6 Select the copied template and make any changes required 164 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Deleting a Template Templates can be deleted using Internet Services 1 To delete a template select the Internet Services Scan option 2 Select the required template from the list on the left of the screen 3 Select the Delete button The template is deleted from the list on the left of the screen Note The Default template cannot be deleted Template Options Destination Services This option is used to select whether the template is for filing and or faxing e File is selected if you only require your Originals to be scanned and stored in the designated filing location e Fax is selected if you also require your scanned image
137. e will rotate it appropriately 7 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over Note The default reading order of SSC your booklet will be from the left page to the right page If a different reading order is required the System Administrator can use Tools to display a reading order option Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information 28 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format Special Pages The Special Pages feature controls how you add special pages such as covers and inserts to your copy job If you have a High Volume Finisher and the optional Tray 6 Inserter installed you can feed the Covers or Inserts from this tray Media loaded into Tray 6 Inserter is not part of the printing process If you require printed Covers you must use pre printed media or use another tray Refer to the Paper and Media guide for more information Note Special Pages cannot be used with Auto Paper Supply a paper supply must be specified The Special Pages options are Covers enables blank or printed pages to be added to the front back or both sides of your set The covers can be a different media to the rest of your job Refer to Covers on page 29 Chapter Starts ensures each chapter starts on a right or left page as required blank pages are inserted automatically if needed Refer to C
138. e your device performs at optimum levels e Replenish the Ink Sticks e Replace the Cleaning Unit e Replace the Staple Cartridges Office Finisher High Volume Finisher only e Empty the Waste Ink Tray e Empty the Hole Punch Waste Container Office Finisher High Volume Finisher only e Print Quality Maintenance e Cleaning Tasks A CAUTION When replacing units DO NOT remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied with your device To place an order for consumables or replacement units please contact your Xerox Representative giving your Company Name product number and the device serial number An option is available within Internet Services which allows the device to contact Xerox automatically to order units when required Refer to the System Administrator Guide for more information Note For information about locating the serial number please refer to Further Assistance on page 324 The device will display a message on the touch screen when consumables or units require replacing or emptying For units nearing the end of life an initial message is displayed to warn you the unit will require replacing shortly An additional message will display when the unit requires replacing Only replace units when a message actually instructs
139. eas the use of 4800 bps is restricted e G3 14 4Kbps selects the transmission rate based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine Initial transmission speed will be 14 400 Bits Per Second bps This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Fax Resolution You can choose one of 3 image resolutions depending on the type of documents being sent The higher the resolution you choose the better the received image will be but it will take longer to transmit The options are e Standard 200 x 100 dpi is recommended for text originals It requires less communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos e Fine 200 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e Superfine 600 x 600 dpi is recommended for photos and halftones or images that have gray tones It requires more communication time but produces the best image quality 120 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Send Time This is sometimes called Delayed Send Use this feature to transmit faxes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone The default setting will send the fax immediately To send the fax at a specific time in the next 24 hours select Send At and either type in or use the arrow buttons to choose the local time that you want the fax sent Fax Dialing Opt
140. eck the functionality of the system and identify performance levels EEN TEE Machine Billin Information Faults Supplies buten Device Settings Support Pages Service Settings FE Ye Fix Image Quality Network Settings 26 Automatic Light Lines Fix Resets Security Settings Troubleshooting Network KI Fax Support Pages A list of reports and support pages for identifying image quality problems are displayed Use the Print option to print the list gt lt Support Pages Troubleshooting Print Quality Page Jet Test Pages Fix Image Quality gt lt Fix Image Quality Print Test Pages Select one of the following options Use this option to Print Test Pages to help you diagnose print issues Analyse the Print Test Pages prints two cleaning pages followed by two test prints to output and choose one of the options to Fix Options fix the image quality problems Light Lines e Light Line fixes unexpected continuous lines of lighter colors or empty stripes visible on the printed output EI Smears Advanced e Smears fixes streaks smudges and help you diagnose print issues Light Lines fixes unexpected continuous lines of lighter colors or empty stripes visible on the printed output Smears fixes streaks smudges and or ink spots of the same or different colors scattered over the printed output Advanced list o
141. ect OK to save your selections and exit All the exceptions programed display in the table 6 If any exceptions pages require individual programing such as a different paper color or a different number of inserts select the entry and use the Edit button to change the programing 136 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Color Options Color Options The Color Options tab contains the following items that enable you to select a color correction or black and white printing customize the Automatic color Paper Output Special Pages Color Options Layout Watermark Advanced e s Q ic Color d correction and adjust colors in your job geb il Pa O Vivid Color Lorem Ipsum Dolor Some features are only supported by O Black nd GE specific printer configurations operating O SE tl systems or driver types You may see more wos acumsanet ae dignissim qu blandit praesent uptatum zrni detenit features or options listed than your specific Ui wR enim ad minimventam quis nostrud eer d evi ce S u 0 rts tation ulamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip amp ea D D D commodo consequat Duis autemyel eum inure dolor p hendrertt in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel Ilum dotore eu feugiat nulla 1158 at vero eros et accumsan et lusto odio dignissim Preview A Q Color Correction Select one of the following color corrections designed for your printer The corrections include
142. ectly grounded power outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in electrical shock Power Cord Electrical Safety e Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment e Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet Do not use an extension cord If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded consult a qualified electrician e Do not place this equipment where people might step on or trip on the power cord 330 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information e Do not place objects on the power cord Equipment Safety This equipment has been designed to provide operator access to safe areas only Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted using covers or guards which require a tool to enable removal Never remove the covers or guards that protect hazardous areas Equipment Safety Do These A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the equipment e Before cleaning this product unplug the product from the electrical outlet Always use materials specifically designated for this product the use of other materials may result in poor performance and create a hazardous situation e Always exerci
143. ed against the left side of the tray e Load pre printed paper and labels face up and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the right edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 3 Make sure that the paper guides just touch the paper e To position the right side guide squeeze the clamp mechanism and slide the guide to touch the right edge of the media e To position the rear guide Squeeze the clamp mechanism and slide the guide to touch the rear edge of the media 4 Close the paper tray The paper settings for the tray are displayed on the touch screen 5 Confirm or change the settings as required 280 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Tray 3 Tray 3 Tray 3 is a high capacity tray It is intended to be the primary feeder for the most commonly used media This tray is permanently set as a dedicated tray and feeds only A4 or 8 5x11 LEF sized media The following media can be loaded in Tray 3 e Upto 2100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper e Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb e Media types e Bond standard or recycled paper e Card e Pre printed media e Hole punched paper e Carbonless paper Tray 3 must not be used to feed labels transparencies envelopes or tabs Tray 4 Bypass Tray can be used for these media types Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower then specified Loading Tray 3 Only
144. ed mailbox Local Polling The Local Polling feature allows a fax document to be left in the memory of your device to be retrieved by another fax machine If the fax document is in memory it may be polled once and deleted or polled several times depending on the Mailbox amp Polling Policies set Select the Local Polling button The options are Non Secure Polling This feature allows you to scan documents and store them in the memory of your device When a remote fax machine polls your device it is able to retrieve the scanned fax document or documents No passcode is required for Non Secure Polling 1 Select the Non Secure Polling button 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit 3 Load the originals to be stored for polling and press Start Local Polling Store for Local Polling Non Secure Polling will scan your originals and store them as me documents on this device Any user with this fax number can retrieve off the documents via the Poll a Remote Fax feature on their device For Secure Polling only fax numbers added to the access list can Kon sociare retrieve the document via the Poll a Remote Fax feature on their device Polli Sek Print All and Delete All Locally Stored Documents affect all non secure and secure documents stored for polling on this device Secure Polling Delete All Local Polling Store for Local Polling off Non Secure Polling Secure Polling Delete All T
145. ed using the numeric keypad H Image Quality yeild ant 2 ane Job Assembly Dialin Char weseti 2 If special characters are required use the Dialing Characters option to enter the number plus additional dialing characters Refer to Dialing Characters on page 81 3 Select Add to add the number to the recipient list Enter additional numbers as required 2 Sided Scanning Original Type Resolution 1 Sided Photo Standard 200x100 dpi The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the recipient list Dialing Characters Additional dialing characters can be accessed by selecting the Dialing Characters button Use this option to enter the fax number if special characters are required To enter a fax number using the dialing characters 1 Select the Dialing Characters button a F Des Dialing Characters Close 2 Use the numeric keypad to enter the ae number plus additional dialing Enter Fax number and press Add or Close Total 1 characters The following characters are 1 Character List 1 Dal Pause available e Dial Pause use to pause S c between numbers The pause 5 Pulse to Tone allows time to switch from an 2 w Wait for Network Tone inside to an outside line during 4 Optional Readability Character automatic dialing For additional pause time add multiple pauses If you are using charge code numbers enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code
146. een saved to the device memory can be accessed using the Saved Jobs option A Saved Job can be selected and printed deleted copied or moved For information about creating and managing Saved Jobs refer to Saving Jobs for use with Print From on page 203 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 22 7 Internet Services Print Print The Print option enables you to senda print ready job such as a PDF or PostScript Job Submission Submit Clear file to the printer over the internet You can Vase send the job from your desktop or froma Seene Goes ts gim Only print ready files pc ps pci ape et may be submited to the device from tts pepe Software upgrade and cionin f be subm ted through the Maerua Lade page nk ingal Savers for thie machine en your remote location To use the Job Submission option E E e Enter the file name of the job of la EE l requiring printing or use the Browse T option to locate the file f ap e Program the printing options required manan gt GEN e Select Submit Job to send the job to the printer over the internet 228 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Scan Scan The Scan option displays a list of all the Workflow Scanning templates that have been created using Internet Services Distribution Finance Dez Monthly Report i Queer Jo Seth Use the Scan options to create modify pe free Satins fee mon see
147. emain stopped until a user selects Resume or Cancel Held Job Timeout Use this option to enable the device to delete jobs which have been held in the job list for a specified period of time and ISS have been abandoned by a user E mail E SS i 6 network scanning incoming server fax L eons g g embedded fax and internet fax jobs are not affected by this setting Held Job Timeout Minute 59 e Enable allows the device to automatically delete held jobs after a specified period set the period of time between 0 and 120 hours and 0 and 59 minutes using the arrow buttons e Disable instructs the device not to delete held jobs from the job list The held jobs are only deleted if the device is switched off System Timeout Use to set whether the device should return to the default screen and feature settings after a set period of time e Enable instructs the device to timeout after the specified period of time Select the period of time between 1 and 10 minutes using the slide bar e Disable should be selected if you do not want the device to automatically return to the default settings after a set period of time ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 277 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Input Select the Input option to access the following settings e Auto Color Detection on page 278 e Photo Text Settings on page 278 Auto Color Detection When the Auto Detect option is being used the device
148. ending a fax and printing a job At times 2 jobs may require the same resource and the contention management system decides which job has priority This device enables you to change the priority of print and copy jobs e Priority enables you to choose which jobs have priority Copy or Print jobs Use the arrow buttons to set the priority for the Copy Jobs and Print Jobs Number 1 has the highest priority e First In First Out instructs the device to process jobs based on when they are received The jobs are processed in the order they enter the job list Out of Staples Options If your device has a finisher you can set how the device handles a stapling job when the stapler runs out of staples e Complete Job Without Stapling instructs the device to continue the job without stapling e Fault Hold Job instructs the device to hold the job in the job list for the user If a job has already started and the staples run out a fault is declared ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 279 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Output Location This option determines the output location for non finished jobs The output location for finished jobs is determined by the system Output Location Ce This feature determines the output Top Tray e Top Tray location for non finished jobs The output location for finished jobs are Stacker Tray EN Stacker Tray determined by the System System generated reports will be sent automati
149. ent Cover Sheet Notes always send faxes with the same message on the fax cover sheet This option eliminates the need to create a cover sheet message each time you send a fax Open Phonebook Editor provides access to the Xerox phonebook editor which is used to setup and edit phonebooks New phonebooks can be created and data can be imported or exported ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Cover Sheet The Cover Sheet option enables you to add a cover sheet to L Recipient Ininemadicne Cover Shen Image yo u r fax 7 Show Beceri Hamer Love Shree Hate Sie ad 8 Sender s Inhonmation Select Print a Cover Sheet to send a cover sheet with your muri job The cover sheet options are displayed Ge Fas Humber e Select the Recipient Information to print 86 O i e Use Show Recipient Names to print the names of the recipients on the cover sheet EE 138 Puch ess lare cenit cn e Use Hide Recipient Names if you do not want the recipient names to print on the cover sheet e Use Show Custom Text to customize the cover sheet with your own information e Select the Sender s Information to print e Use Show Sender s Information to print the sender s information on the cover sheet e Use Hide Sender s Information if you do not want the sender s information to print on the cover sheet e Enter the details of the sender to include on the cover sheet e Fax Number e Organizat
150. ent to select a different scanning or printing order this feature provides users with the option of changing the scan or print order Reading Order Options rint Order x Scan Order impacts the Book Copying and Book Faxing Hide Reading Order features Print Order impacts the Page Layout and Booklet Creation Show Reading Order features Left to Right To change the default Show Reading Order P The default Reading Order is must be selected and saved e Scan Order impacts the Book Copying and Book Faxing features Select Hide Reading Order if you do not want the user to view the option to change the reading order To display the feature select Show Reading Order e Print Order impacts the Page Layout and Booklet Creation features Select Hide Reading Order if you do not want the user to be able to view the option to change the reading order To display the reading order feature select Show Reading Order ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 287 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Auto Image Rotation The Auto Image Rotation feature optimizes image output based on the job Auto Image Rotation setti Ngs selected Disabli ng Auto Rotation When Auto R E Selected When Auto Paper Selected E ee are ma result in ima e loss e Auto Rotate as needed EI Auto Rotate as needed anima y g g Se Disabling Es auto rotation may ke Use the When Auto R E Selected e Disable Rotation 9 Disable Rotation
151. er Settings This setting determines whether an incoming fax is printed onto media that is selected automatically by the device according to the parameters of the fax or specified manually within this feature e Automatic allows the device to automatically select a paper size for incoming faxes If an exact match is not available the incoming fax is printed on the next best match available and may be reduced to fit e Manual enables you to select the paper selection option required e Paper Size is used to select a Normal paper size for all incoming faxes or Other e Paper Type amp Color is used to program the type and color of media required for incoming faxes e Fitto Paper allows you to select Reduce to Fit if all faxes require reducing or enlarging to fit the paper selected 290 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Ring Volume This setting enables the user to hear a ringing tone from the device when an incoming fax is being received e Enabled instructs the device to sound the tone when a fax is received Select High Medium or Low e Disabled deactivates the tone Secure Receive If this option is enabled a 4 digit passcode is requested The passcode is then required in order to print any incoming fax e Enable activates Secure Receive enter a 4 digit passcode to be used to release incoming fax jobs for printing e Disable enables all incoming faxes to print without the passco
152. er Size Paper Type Paper Color including Tray 4 Bypass is displayed The C Plain paper Size Type and Color are the Ee attributes set when loading the trays Elan Plain E Transparency d Plain 262 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Information Pages Using this option a configuration report paper tips and individual guides can be e printed providing information about the S P setup functions and features of your alae Y E Information Pages ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Billing Summary It also provides sampler pages which are Copying Guide used for checking the quality and color Scanning Guide settings Faxing Guide Select the report guide or sampler page Office Demo Page required and select Print Note Access to the Information Pages may be restricted Contact your System Administrator or refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for further information Installed Options This option displays a list of the Services or additional solutions which have been installed on your device Colorqube 9201 BEE Option Name Status Ce Installed Options Workflow Scanning Enabled E mail Disabled Internet Fax Enabled Embedded Fax Enabled Server Fax Enabled Maintenance Assistant Use this option to send diagnostic information about the device to Xerox over the network con nection Select button below to send the machine s diagnostic information to Xerox This
153. ew staple cartridge box Unpack and install the staple cartridge in the finisher The staple cartridge clicks into place Repeat the procedure for the other booklet maker staple cartridge Push in the booklet maker module and close the finisher door Emptying the Waste Ink Tray The Waste Ink Tray accumulates ink debris resulting from printhead maintenance You must occasionally empty the Waste Ink Tray The device will not work if the waste ink tray is full The waste ink is non toxic and can be disposed of through your normal refuse collection The device displays a message when the tray is approximately 80 full and will not permit the printhead maintenance sequence to begin when the tray is full 312 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care The waste tray will need to be emptied approximately 4 times per year or more depending on usage A CAUTION If you remove the waste ink tray you must always empty it before replacing it Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container The hole punch waste container is a catch tray that collects the waste punched paper Your device will prompt you when the hole punch waste container needs emptying Detail instructions are provided on the touch screen Follow the instructions and labels provided when emptying the container e Slide the hole punch waste container out of the finisher Dispose of the waste punched paper in the waste bin e Ins
154. f expert routines Customer Service may direct you to enter this option Please note prints within the Fix Image Quality feature will not be billed inks pots of the same or different colors scattered over the printed output e Advanced provides a list of expert routines Customer Support may direct you to select this option Refer to Fix Image Quality on page 320 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 301 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting Automatic Light Lines Fix gt lt Automatic Light Lines Fix Use this option to fix any Banding i Light Lines are unexpected lines of lighter colors or 4 i 4 a empty stripes visible on the printed output problems E D Coop S Quick Fix Corrects Light Lines when 09160160 um e Quick Banding Fix corrects banding E 7 a Full Fix is completed tem porarily and may slow print E Of Full Fix Performs a maintenance routine when the machine is idle speeds until a Full Banding Fix is Eco Fix minimizes waste ink and paper usage com p leted Always Fix performs a maintenance routine earlier ut will use more ink an er e Onis used to correct banding when it 5 Recommended Settings e Off is selected if no action 5 required e Full Fix takes approximately eight minutes to complete e Eco Fix is selected to correct banding when the device is not in use e Always Fix is selected to correct banding when it is detected e Off is selected if no action is re
155. f you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your Telephone Company or a qualified installer Canada Note The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the User s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users must make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations 340 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should make sure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe systems if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important
156. feature Refer to Build Job on page 42 for more information 24 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Layout Adjustment Image Shift Image Shift allows you to move the position of the image on the output page The options are Auto Center automatically centers the scanned image on the output paper To work effectively the original should be smaller than the selected output media or alternatively the image should be reduced Margin Shift moves the image up down or left right on the page to tal image Shift give a bigger or smaller top and left side 1 margin Enter the shift required by 00 20 selecting a field or use the arrow eee oo buttons Shift is entered in 1 mm 0 1 increments up to 50 mm 2 0 None Selected Mirror Side 1 When copying 2 sided there are two options e Adjust the margin of side two independently of side one e Create a mirror image of side one to provide a binding margin Presets provide access to commonly used shift settings and are customized by the System Administrator using Tools Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original Note The device applies an automatic edge deletion to all printed output The options are All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust
157. fer to Finishing Devices on page 17 for more information ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 27 Copy Output Format To create a booklet 1 Select Booklet Creation and On Note Booklet Creation is not available if Auto Paper is selected Select an alternative Paper Supply option 2 Select the Paper Supply button and select the tray that contains the paper Booklet Creation you want to use bi If using the High Volume Finisher with Si Booklet Maker to fold and staple your output a Short Edge Feed SEF Paper 0 Supply must be selected Paper Supply 1 4 Original Input W Plain 1 Sided Originals 3 From the Original Input drop down menu select either 1 Sided Originals Booklet Creation or 2 Sided Originals according to the Fold amp Staple originals you are using of 4 If available select either Fold or Fold s EN Een and Staple as required and select P E Save to confirm your selections 5 Load your originals into the document Paper Supply feeder P 12l 4 E orisina Input ES Plain 1 Sided Originals 6 Use the Original Orientation option on the Layout Adjustment tab to De Original Orientation select the correct feed and image Upright mages and Sideways mages refer to E e direction the images are loaded in the orientation for the originals Refer to Upright images Document Feeder s ge D Portrait and Landscape Originals refer to the ENEE 0 e or sideways and the devic
158. ferences Cancel ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 115 Fax from PC Faxing from a PC 10 116 If you require a Cover Sheet to be sent with your fax document select Print a Cover Sheet in the Cover Sheet tab The Cover Sheet options Recipients Cover Sheet Options Cover Sheet Options window will display automatically allowing you to customize the page Do Not Pint a Cover Shea to your requirements When you have selected all the options you require select OK Preferences Cancel Select the Options tab to choose Recipients Cover Sheet Options e With or without a Confirmation Sheet Confirmation Sheet e The Send Speed either Super G3 33 6 Kbps Forced 4800 bps a S or G3 14 4Kbps ee e The Resolution of the fax either Standard Fine or Superfine en gt The Send Time if you want to delay the transmission of your fax a aos BERG Fax Dialing Opt S Dialing Prefix e Dialing options for a number prefix or credit card billing systems When you have selected all the options you require select OK Credit Card Select OK on the print driver screen and OK on the Print screen The Fax Confirmation screen will appear with the list of recipients you have chosen Preferences Cancel If you wish to make any changes edit the details by selecting the button with a pencil icon If the details are correct select the OK button and your fax will be submitted to the device job
159. fferent originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Fax Then select the Job Assembly tab Layout Fax Job Image Quality Adjustment ions Assembly Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or asegment of pages ag Su DI IER rT Pry z ALLI WL L b i llna L You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text and 2 sl Renz EE completed job First split the originals into Eis with SE RES photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button 2 Select Display this window between segments to view the Build Job screen PELIE during scanning Then select Save 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the job Note The fax destination details L must be entered prior to scanning Display his window elween segments 4 Load the first segment originals and ratiba press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list The following options can be applied to any segment e Delete Last Segment deletes the last segment scanned You can continue programing the Build Job e Delete All Segments delete
160. file sizes and normal image quality ae eT Advanced Layout Settings Adjustment Address Book e E mail SA Recipient E mail Options Assembly Ter Sharing amp Printing Archival Small File Size Ww Hoh Quali gt e S CS Output Color Color e OCR is best for documents that are going to be processed by Optical Character Recognition OCR software This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e High Quality Printing is best for business documents containing detailed graphics and photos This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e Simple Scan is used for faster processing but may result in excessively large file sizes Using this setting applies only minimal image processing and compression e View Details is used to access all the Scan Presets options available If using this option select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 185 E mail Advanced Settings Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access to em fom SS Fam the features which enhance the image Omage Options O mage Enhancement O Resolution quality or output quality To access the Ten 7 Advanced Settings select Services Home Oe srs and E mail Then select the Advanced Settings tab O quality File Size Quality Normal File Size Small Image Options Image Options is used to change the appearance of
161. fix or choose an existing one from the list provided Page Numbers Use the following instructions to program Page Numbers 1 34 Select the Output Format tab Annotations button and then Page BE annotations Numbers Annotations will not be applied to Covers Front or Back Tabs Inserts Blank Chapter Start Pages Comment Date Bates Stamp ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format 2 Select the On button a 3 Specify the position of the page A number by selecting one of the arrow e buttons on the right kz 4 Select the Page Number input box E and use the numeric keypad to enter the starting page number you want printed on your copy output 5 From the drop down menu on the left GZ x select either All Pages or All Pages All Pages Except First to determine which pages the page number will apply to 6 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional annotations as required 7 Program the Format amp Style options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style page 38 for instructions 8 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job Comment Use the following instructions to add a Comment al Select the Output Format tab Annotations button and then B annotations Comment RL Annotations will not be applied to Covers Front or Back Tabs Inserts Blank Chapter Start
162. g Network Accounting e Xerox Standard Accounting is an accounting system setup using the Internet Services user interface Once enabled the IP address of the device is entered and Xerox Standard Accounting can be setup e Network Accounting is a feature of the device which automatically tracks print scan server fax and copy usage for each user Network Accounting is run over a network and the accounting functions are performed remotely via third party software Auxiliary Access These options are used to setup and configure a third party device installed on the device for accounting purposes or to restrict use e Auxiliary Device Type is used to select the auxiliary device being used on the device e Service Access amp Accounting is used to select the services which require restricting and the usage tracking e Job Timeout sets the duration of time allowed before the system deletes the current job due to additional payment being required or a network printing job being held in the job list e Double Count Large Impressions is used to specify how the system counts the impressions for sheets larger than 380mm 15 for example A3 or 11x17 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 297 Administration and Accounting Accounting Settings Xerox Standard Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting provides the ability to track usage of print copy scan and fax job services It is provided as standard and is setup using Internet Services Se
163. g to specify how may attempts should be made to resend the fax and which pages should be resent e Set number of resends is used to specify how many times the fax is resent Between 0 and 5 can be selected e Failed page s without a cover page is selected to resend the failed pages but not the cover page again e Whole Job without a cover page is selected if the entire job should be resent but not the cover page e Failed page s with a cover page is selected if only the failed pages should be resent with a cover page e Whole job with cover page is selected if the whole job including the cover page should be resent Audio Line Monitor When the device is transmitting a fax the dialing handshake and digital data creates audible beeps and buzzing sounds The audio line monitor allows a user to listen to the call progress and hear the number dialled and the beginning of the handshake e Enable allows the transmission tones to be heard Select High Medium or Low e Disable deactivates the sounds Send Header Text When a fax is sent it includes the telephone number name date time and page number at the top of each page of the fax You can add a personalised sentence to the header of all the fax pages using this option e Enter the text required on the Header Up to 30 characters can be entered Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character entry or use Clear Text to delete the entire entry Batch Send Use this featu
164. giele ele EE 134 E SEEE ET 134 H DTE 135 AAT EX EDUN peere 135 Colar OPONE errre 137 COlOr CONECO ee EE a dee 137 Print Settings on the Page 138 LEY OU VY CL dr e EE 139 PAJE LOVOUL EE EE EE EE 139 der le EE 141 AOV CG EE 143 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 125 Print Introduction Introduction The ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 will produce high quality prints from your electronic documents However the advanced print features of this machine will enable you to create professionally finished documents at the click of a mouse button For example you can e Publish your prints as booklets e Put covers onto your prints e Automatically staple or hole punch e Produce sets of transparencies with dividers ready for a presentation and many more features that will take the strain out of printing You access the printer from your PC application in the normal way through a print driver A print driver converts the code contained in an electronic document into a language that the printer can understand You can use generic print drivers on this printer but they will not enable all the features This is why you should use the print drivers that accompany this printer There are numerous print drivers for this device to enable it to be used on all the popular computer operating systems They are provided on a disc with your device or you can download the latest versions from the Xerox website ww
165. ginals containing photos magazine pictures or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e Standard 200x100 dpi is a wa ob recommended for text originals It i Enter number and press Add Dialing requires less communication time but ee VW does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos Book e Fine 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the default EES et ae resolution and the best choice in most ae cases e Superfine 600 dpi is recommended Fine 200 dpi for photos and halftones or images that have gray tones It requires more communication time but produces the best image quality ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 59 Fax Image Quality Image Quality The Image Quality options provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output quality To access the Image Quality options select Services Home and Fax Then select the Image Quality tab job Image Quality Assembly Dimage Options OD image Enhancement Lighten Darken Normal Suppression Off Sharpness Normal Aut
166. good quality Note If you have poor quality originals use the document glass to copy a new set Ensure that the document feeder guides are against the edges of the loaded originals ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 319 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting e Check that your originals are within specification and that the loaded originals do not cover the maximum fill line on the document feeder guides Refer to www xerox com for specifications information Image Quality Problems Additional options for correcting image Machine quality problems are available in Tools They provide various tests to check the functionality of the system and identify Information Supplies Information Ar Support Pages Troubleshooting A Supp 9 performance levels 2 Fix Image Quality e Press the Machine Status button E Network Select the Tools tab e Select Troubleshooting The troubleshooting options are displayed Support Pages Use this option to print the Troubleshooting Print Quality Page and the Jet Test Pages The Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Print Quaity Page Print Quality Page provides information about problem solving and the options which can be used to resolve issues The Jet Test Pages highlight any image quality issues on your device 2 Support Pages Jet Test Pages Use the Print option to print the pages Fix Image Quality Use
167. h as Energy Saver Paper Trays and Timeout Settings The Internet Services Help function describes all the features and functions available 220 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Accessing Internet Services Accessing Internet Services Prior to connecting to Internet Services the device must be physically connected to the network with TCP IP and HTTP enabled An operational workstation with TCP IP Internet or Intranet accessibility is also required To access Internet Services 1 2 Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is D 192 168 100 100 enter the following i le i ae XEROX ColorQube 9303 into the URL field BEES http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 221 Internet Services Status Status The Status option provides information about the device Welcome The Welcome page provides information about setting up and installing your de 5 ce Caie w ta tna ria ieee a Lege Eet Erd ka gt Ee vice Bekoa fo pour r m Ces Poe pi eee poe GRE El 12 REE te ee
168. hapter Starts on page 31 Inserts enables blank pages to be inserted at designated places within your copy sets Single or multiple pages can be inserted This option is also used to insert Pre Cut tabs into your document Refer to Inserts on page 32 Exceptions are used to program pages that require printing on a different media to the rest of your job Refer to Exceptions on page 33 Note When identifying the page number to enter for Chapter Starts Inserts and Exceptions count each side as a separate page if scanning a 2 sided document Covers Use the following instructions to program Covers T On the Copy tab select the paper you want to use for the main body of the copies 9 be Note Special Pages is not available if PERREN EN Auto Select EE Auto Paper is selected Pla 1 Staple Black amp White L Plain 1 2 Sided Portrait 211x17 1 Staple LJ Plain 2 2 Sided Landstupe 5x11 38 Transparency 2 1 Sided More Rotate Side 2 If required load special media into another paper tray ensuring that it is in the same orientation as the paper you are using for the body of your copies Update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 29 Copy Output Format 3 Select the Output Format tab Special Pages button and then TR Special Pages Covers This feature controls how special pages are applied to your copied sets Covers can be blank or contain
169. he originals are scanned and stored in memory ready to be polled 70 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Secure Polling Fax Options This feature allows you to scan documents and store them in the memory of your device ready for polling Secure Polling is used for sensitive documents access is only granted if the fax numbers of the retrieving devices have been entered or if the Allow All Address Book fax numbers access option is selected 1 Select the Secure Polling button 2 Enter the fax numbers of the devices retrieving the document or select Allow All Address Book fax numbers access he number of the remote fax machine must be stored in the Address Book 3 Use Add to add more than one number to the list Use the Address Book option to add a specific number from the directory Local Polling Store for Local Polling Non Secure Polling Secure Polling Stored Local Documents Print All 4 Select Save to save your selections and exit 5 Load the originals to be stored for polling and press Start The originals are scanned and stored in memory ready to be polled Stored Local Document Documents stored in memory for local polling can be printed or deleted e Select Print All to print the documents stored in memory e Select Delete All to delete all stored documents A confirmation screen is displayed select Delete All or Cancel Select Save to save your selections and exit
170. hich are being polled Use Add to add more than one number to the list Use the Speed Dial or Address Book gt EE option to add a specific number from the directory Use the Dialing Characters option to enter special characters if required Poll a Remote Fax Use Delay Send to program a specific time to poll the remote machine Refer to Delay Send on page 67 Select Poll Now to commence polling _ Remote Polling The remote device is polled and the retrieved document printed Select Close to exit Poll a Remote Mailbox The Poll Remote Mailbox feature allows you to call a mailbox which is set up on a remote fax machine The call locates and retrieves faxes stored within the Polled mailbox 1 Select the Poll a Remote Mailbox button _ Remote Polling Enter the fax number of the device being polled Use the Address Book e option to add the number if required Poll a Remote Use the Dialing Characters option to enter the number if special characters are required Refer to Dialing Characters on page 52 Enter the Mailbox Number between 001 and 200 Enter the 4 digit Mailbox Passcode Select Poll Now to commence polling the mailbox Fax Number 017775526423 The remote device is polled and the retrieved document printed Select Close to exit 72 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have di
171. i ER e Originals are printed on one side and EE you want 2 sided copies You can also 1 Hran Cii Ponai select the Rotate Side 2 button to EI ad 11817 More EI 2 2 Sided n NE have the second page rotated 180 eebe C S CH Transparency 2 1 Sided 100 More Folding Rotate Side 2 More ColorQube 3 13 Copy Copy Options e 2 gt 2 Sided use this option if you want to make two sided copies from two sided originals You can also select the Rotate Side 2 button to have the second page rotated 180 e 2 gt 1 Sided this option will make one sided copies from two sided originals Note If using the document glass to scan originals the device displays a message when ready to scan side 2 Copy Output The most commonly used Copy Output options are selected directly from the Copy tab The options available are dependent on the finishing device and kits installed Refer to Finishing Devices on page 17 e Collated sorts your copies into sets 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 e Uncollated sorts your copies into Auto Detect Black amp White Output Color Output Format 2 Sided Copying ae Paper Supply ove Sa stacks 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 GEES ee e 1 Staple Portrait staple will be positioned in one of the short edge corners depending on how the originals are loaded Auto Select 1E A4 Plain 211x17 Plain 2 2 Sided 1 Staple 1 2 Sided Por
172. ial pages for your print job Up to 250 inserts and exception pages can be in clu ded in the table You can ch an g e the Paper Output Special Pages Color Options Layout Watermark Advanced width of the columns in the table f S i 91 Add Covers Add Inserts Add Exceptions To edit delete or move an entry in the Setup table use the following buttons E Print Side 1 Blue Insert Quantity 1 Blue S E i 2 Sided Print Fli Long Edge 81 Edit you can select single or Exception EE e Bhe multiple entries and use this button to Pie joni change the properties for the selected Long Edge Blue entries Print on Side 2 Blue S Delete is used to delete an individual entry or a selection of entries e Delete All is used to delete all the ge entries in the table Ceterum Undo is used to undo the last actions if you make an error e Up and Down are used to move the entries up or down in the table Some features are only supported by specific printer configurations operating systems or driver types You may see more features or options listed than your specific device supports Add Covers Use this option to add blank or printed covers to your printed document 1 To add a cover select the Add Covers button above the table R ke Front Cem Paper Ei Hack Cover Papen Co E ei FP 2 E i e Front and Back Same provides a front and back Pie Dent T
173. ided is used if your original documents are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar The Layout Se a Fax Image Quality Adjustment Options Job Assembly Fax Enter number and press Add Li Dialing LUT Characters Fax a Directory 2 Sided Scanning Original Type Resolution 1 Sided Photo Standard 200x100 dpi Layout Fax Image Quality Adjustment Options Job Assembly He Dialing Characters Fax Directory 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 2 Sided Scanning 1 Sided document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for Originals containing high quality photographs and halftones Using this setting the scanned image will contain medium quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced 84 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax a Image Quality Sen E Job Assembly Ba Dialing Characters L Fax d Directory Photo amp Text Photo 2 Sided Scanning bel O
174. idual images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper e Repeat Image multiple copies of the same image reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper The actual number of rows and columns available is limited by the minimum reduction value 25 and your selected paper output Note Some features cannot be used with the Page Layout feature and will be grayed out on the Touch Screen ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 39 Copy Output Format The examples shown here are typical outputs that can be produced when using the Page Layout feature 1 40 Note The practical limit is for 16 images on A4 8 5x11 paper On the Copy tab select the paper you want to use for the copies Select the Output Format tab then Page Layout Select the Page Layout option required Pages per Slide e Select the button that represents the required number of images per page e Alternatively select the Specify Rows amp Columns button and use the arrow buttons to select the 4 Originals using 2 6 Originals using 3 2 Originals using 2 rows and 2 columns rows and 2 rows and 1 column columns Copy Output Color Black 6 White More educe Era k ESP f More K Image Quality HH Page Layout Pages per side EN Repeat Image number of rows and columns from 1 to 15 e Select either Portrait Originals or Landscape Originals from the drop down menu on the right Repeat Image e Select the button
175. ilboxes within its memory To allow a remote user to fax to your mailbox they must know your mailbox number To retrieve a document from your mailbox the remote user must know your mailbox number and if appropriate your passcode The mailbox passcode ensures that the fax documents held in the mailbox are secure and can only be accessed by an authorized user The passcode is a 4 digit number If the mailbox has been set up with a passcode of 0000 then any combination of numbers including no numbers can be entered as the passcode to gain access to the mailbox Select the Mailboxes button The options are Send to Remote Mailbox This feature enables you to send a fax directly to an individual s private mailbox on a remote machine The remote machine must have mailbox capabilities 1 Select Send to Remote Mailbox 2 Enter the recipient s fax number using the control panel or select the ee Characters Send to Remote ilbox Address Book option and select the recipient from the directory Se EE Oe 200 B Address aor 9 Local Ge 3 To send to a remote mailbox you must know the recipients mailbox number Enter the Mailbox Number between 001 and 200 4 Enter the 4 digit Mailbox Passcode 5 Select Save to save your selections and exit 0000 pride E Sc Geier Maar Mailbox Passc Delete Local Mailbox Documents 6 Use Delay Send to program a specific time to send the fax Refer to Delay Send on page 67
176. iling Document Management add File Destinations 1 Items Requested 0 Added Options tab LE File Name This feature enables you to name the file that is stored e Using the keyboard enter the name of the file E File Name e Upto 40 alphanumeric Enter cl gt To delete a character use the d 0 K h ON 0 9 O N O d back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text 5 DEEG e Use the Keyboards button to TTT TTT T zs access additional language S IR SR ERR EE keyboards e Select Save to save your selections and exit File Format File Format determines the type of file created You can select the file format you wish to use for your scanned image The options are e PDF Portable Document Format allows recipients with the right 9 Fite Format software to view print or edit the file K PDF Searchable S Portable Document Format PDF nom atte r what th eir com p ute r Ai e ele Best suited for Sharing editing searching and p atf orm gt printing documents PDF A Searchable Searchable This file will be run through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This could take a few PS minutes It will allow the text in the resulting file to be searchable and editable e Image Only optimises the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified Multi Page TIFF TIFF 1 File per Page Document K Language 1 File per Page English ColorQube 9301 9
177. in supplies for your device Enter the number using the keyboard and select Save To delete an incorrect character entry use the backspace key or to delete the entire entry select Clear Select Next to continue to the next screen A completion screen is displayed with instructions for printing a configuration report if required Select Done to exit Select another option to program or select Close to return to the previous screen Display Brightness Enables you to adjust the brightness of the touch screen to suit the ambient light levels s Whence N Display Brightness Brighten Darken A Brighten e Adjust the brightness as required using the indicator Normal Darken Configuration Information Pages Provides various options for printing the G Ee configuration report and information V ELIE SEED IDLE SEO OO WE WE NEE pag es Restricting Access Rights to SA only will ensure that the Configuration Report and Information Pages can EI only be printed by authenticated System Administrator Administrator only e Administrator only ensures that the configuration report and information open to at users pages can only be printed by authenticated System Administrators e Open to all users provides all users with access to print the configuration EEN report and information pages ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 283 Administration and Accounting Device Settings e Print Configuration at Power On set to Yes
178. inal Size on page 62 The options are Both Pages use to scan both pages the left page of the book will be BA Book Faxing scanned first Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50 BD mm 0 to 2 to be deleted from the P center of the book in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the ie gutter of the book 2 52 0 Left Page Only use to scan the left Ri Sege page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm O to 1 to be deleted from the right side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book Right Page Only use to scan the right page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the left side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book Reading Order use to select if the pages read from Left to Right or Right to Left Note The Reading Order option may not be displayed if it has not been enabled in Tools Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information Select Save to save your selections and exit Several pages of a bound document can be faxed using the Build Job feature Refer to Build Job on page 73 for more information 64 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Fax Options Fax Options The Fax Options allow you to specify how your fax document is transmitted and how Image Quality Fax Options it is pr
179. ing the Services Home button then the Fax option Using Fax enables you to scan your documents and send them to most types of fax machines that are connected to the telephone network Your device is connected directly toa telephone line and therefore gives you direct control over your fax transmissions This type of fax travels over normal telephone lines and will therefore be charged at telephone rates The standard Fax option has the ability to connect to one telephone An Extended Fax option is also available which utilizes two telephone lines Using two telephone lines provides the capability to simultaneously send and receive Note This device only faxes in black and white Most feature screens include these buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen Instructions for sending a fax and using the basic features are provided in the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How To Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 76 50 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Dialing Options The dialing options enable you to enter the destinatio
180. ings for the job 4 Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Saved Job The Saved Job options are displayed 5 Program the Saved Job options as required Lagan e Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print EI Job Name s e Use Document Name to store and print the job Folder e Job Name is used to enter a name for the job or Defaut Public Foie JL select Use Document Name to use the filename of Ey Print and Save the document being submitted SC e Folder is used to select a location to store the job 5 Passcode The Default Public Folder is available to all users 4 10 Digits other folders may have restricted access of TOE 4 10 Digits e Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to the job The job can only be accessed and printed using the passcode entered here 6 Select OK to save the settings and exit the Saved Job options Program the print features required for the saved job 7 The Help option provides an explanation of all the options 8 Select OK to save the print settings ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 203 Print From Saving Jobs for use with Print From 9 Select OK on the Print dialogue window to send the job The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving and printing depending on the selection Using Internet Services The Print option within Internet Services can also be used to create a Saved Job The job file submitted must be a print ready file su
181. inted at the receiving fax machine GE Gees ae To access the Fax Options select Services E iaa Home and Fax Then select the Fax Opti ons tab O Send Header Text O Mailboxes OD Local Polling off off Off EB Remote Polling Poll a Remote Fax Confirmation Report Select Confirmation Report to print a broadcast report to identify the success or failure of a fax job The options displayed depend on the settings enabled in Tools Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information The options are Print Confirmation e Use to print a transmission report containing details about the fax E Confirmation Report together with a reduced copy of the first faxed page Print Confirmation e The Confirmation report is printed ic on eror on after every transmission e When sending a fax to multiple recipients one report is printed listing all of the recipients Print On Error Only e Select this option to print the Confirmation report only if an error occurs with the transmission Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 65 Fax Fax Options Starting Rate Use Starting Rate to select the speed at which the device starts transmitting your fax job A high starting rate should be used in good transmission areas and a low rate in poor quality areas The options are Super G3 33 6 Kbps e Determines the transmission rate to be used based on the maximum
182. ion Refer to Covers on page 29 5 Use the arrow buttons to enter how ges 7 Plain many inserts should be added 6 Select the Paper Supply button and select the tray that contains the Inserts media Select Save to save your selection 7 Select the Add button to confirm your selections and add the programed Insert to the list on the right Add further Inserts as required 8 Select Close to return to the Special Pages screen 32 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format A list of the selected Special Pages is displayed on the screen To make changes select the item in the list you wish to change and use Edit Use Delete or Delete All to delete unwanted entries Select Close Menu to exit from the drop down menu 9 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job Exceptions Use the following instructions to program Exceptions 1 On the Copy tab select the paper you Copy Image Quality S Output Format Job Assembly want to use for the main body of the Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output copies 6 E 75 Note Special Pages is not available if gaz Auto Paper is selected 1 1 Sided Collated S Black White O ig 1 2 Sided Hn oh 2 If required load special media into 1 staple 2 bec e Plain 2 2 Sided another paper tray ensuring that itis you are using for the body of your copies Rotate Side 2 More Reduce Enlarge a
183. ion e Telephone Number e E mail Address e Use Cover Sheet Image to select an image or text to include on the cover sheet Select New to import an image to include or to create your own text e Use Cover Sheet Paper Size to select the paper size for the cover sheet ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 119 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Options On this screen there are 5 fax transmission options that you may use to customize the transmission of your fax Recipients Cover Sheet Options e Confirmation Sheet Confirmation Sheet rE Lal Send Speed Here you can choose to print a Confirmation Sheet that will S Pen H confirm the success or failure of the transmission E Select Print a Confirmation Sheet using the drop down DE menu Send At Lab Send Speed Fax Dialing Options Dialing Prefix You can choose one of 3 transmission speeds Select Send Se Speed to select the transmission speed The options are Credit Card e Super G3 33 6 Kbps this is the fastest transmission rate and is the default setting This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Initial transmission speed will be 33 600 Bits Per gt Preferences Cancel Second bps e Forced 4800 bps used in areas of low quality communication when experiencing telephone noise or when fax connections are susceptible to errors 4800 bps is a slower transmission rate but is less susceptible to errors In some regional ar
184. ion of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents EEE EE ERESSE 96 ag FOX E 97 New Recipient 97 FIOM EE 98 SUDICC 004200 98 BOOK EE 99 OUtOUE COMO EE 7 99 E eel geen 0 EE ER 100 EE 100 e ee Lee ee 101 E eae 20 0 2 11 IMAGE lle Cl EE 101 RESOMMOM ee ee EES 102 Quality File 0 8 103 Layout Adj stment EE 104 Original Orientation 0 rits iran r LARS een EPR SEST RIIA AN RELSE 104 EE 105 uge E e EE 106 File ee EE 106 005000 023222 2222 222000000 0 02 000 E REENA 107 zeigt EEN 107 108 JODA OMD ee ee ee ee ee er 109 DUNG JOD EEN 109 LG TO eee a se R ee ee eee ee eee meee 110 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 95 Internet Fax Introduction Introduction Internet Fax is a standard feature that can be enabled If enabled it is selected by pressing the Services Home button then the Internet Fax option Internet Fax enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document The scanned image is converted into e mail format to
185. ions Use if you need to add an external access number a country code or an area code to the recipient number or if a credit card number is required e Select Dialing Prefix if you need to add for example an external access number a country code or an area code to the recipient number you have selected on the recipients screen e Select Credit Card if you want to bill the call to a credit card You can conceal the credit card number from the recipient by using before and after the part of the number you want to conceal ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 121 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options 122 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax from PC Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ag dee ein o i gt 020000 126 Paper RT EE 128 NGO KEE 128 PODER erea ee cease sane eree sees E ess e 130 EE EE ee EE EE 131 SI Ce NEE 131 8 12 Output EE 13
186. ions operating ERER 5 aus systems or driver types You may see more Layout features or options listed than your specific Page Layout Options device supports Portrait v 1 Sided Print v Watermark Saved Settings Ee G Page Layout Pages Per Sheet N Up Select this option to print 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 pages on each side of a sheet of paper Selecting multiple pages per sheet saves paper and is useful when you want to review the layout of the document ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 139 Print Layout Watermark Booklet Layout Automatically prints 2 pages on each side of each sheet of paper Booklet Options Booklet Finishing 24 O None The printer driver changes the order of the pages so that they j O Booklet Fold can be folded and stapled to create a booklet sabe Booklet Fold and Staple To program additional booklet settings select the Booklet EE Options button Automatically Select e Booklet Fold folds the booklet s e Booklet Fold and Staple staples the booklet in the L center and then folds Gutter 0 216 Points 4 e Gutter shifts the images to create a center margin for 2 the booklet Specify the horizontal distance in points between the page images A point is 1 72 or 35 mm 1 Creep 0 0 1 0 Points e Creep gradually shifts the images throughout the document providing less shift in the center of the booklet and mor
187. ions and exit 190 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail ea Original Size v Auto Detect You are specifying the area that will be scanned ey Original size Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custom E Scan Area Mixed Size Originals G Original Size The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed in the feeder and processed at the same time e Auto Detect Preset Scan Areas Custom Scan Area Mixed Size Originals Layout Adjustment Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original The options are e All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all the edges Use the K Edge Erase arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 9 All Edges 2 0 All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted EW Individual Edges e Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount for each edge from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 191 E mail E mail Options E mail Options The E mail Options allow you to a o temporarily change the format of the e mail image file set a Reply To address and 21 ra a a
188. ions sent in the last billing meter transmission The meter data is recorded in the Xerox service management system It is used for the invoicing of metered service agreements and also for evaluating consumable usage against printer performance Email notifications can be setup to alert you of the following changes e Billing meter reads reported an alert is generated when billing meter readings have taken place You can set up your device so that it will automatically offer meter readings when requested by the Xerox Communication Server e SMart eSolutions enrollment is cancelled an alert is generated when the state is changed from Enrolled to Not Enrolled e SMart eSolutions communication error has occurred an alert is generated when there is a communication error For information about configuring the Meter Assistant settings refer to the System Administrator Guide Supplies Assistant The Supplies Assistant enables you to proactively manage ink and component supplies for your device ensuring that you never run out It monitors supplies usage and automatically orders supplies based on actual usage SMart eSolutions A Device Communication Matus The most recent supplies usage information sent to Xerox can also be viewed Use the Refresh button to ensure the latest information is displayed For information about configuring the Supplies Assistant settings refer to the
189. ird drop down menu e No Page Borders does not print a border around each page e Draw Page Borders prints a border around each page 140 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Watermark Layout Watermark A watermark is a picture or text independent of that provided by the application that is printed on every page or the first page of the job The watermark options are provided in the drop down menu There are pre set watermarks listed available Draft Confidential and Copy Once a watermark is selected use the Options menu to select whether to print the watermark in the background in the foreground or blend with the job Also select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only Additional watermarks can be created using the New option The Watermark Editor screen is displayed with options for creating a new watermark Name is used to enter a name for the watermark The name appears in the watermark selection menu under the Layout Watermark tab When creating a new watermark type a name that is no more than 255 characters The Options pull down menu allows you to choose the type of watermark to create Select one of the following options Text uses the characters that you type in the Text field This is displayed in the document as the watermark Time Stamp uses a time stamp as the watermark Select whether to include the weekday date time and or time zone in the Time Stamp Format drop dow
190. ite to select monotone FAX Destination configured Pre programmed output regardless of the color of your original e Grayscale to use gray scales instead of color e Color to select color output from your original 150 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Options 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to oeren SSS A eege Scanning Settings Adjustment Options Assembly set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original Details for defaultTemplate document are scanned The options are 096 0000 gt e 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to 2 scan your originals with this option uae GES e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your Auto Detect Si original opens up like a calendar The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for maA S Ze SN S Scanning Settings Adjustment Options Assembly Originals containing high quality Details for defaultTemplate photographs and halftones Using FAX Destination configured Pre programmed this setting the scanned image will contain medium q
191. ited States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents eye Tele Le EE 256 JOD e D CEET 257 ege e EEN 257 Compeed TOE R A R R AEEA NERAN Ra ER NR SENS 258 Veto sie fe CN 260 Machine e EE 262 Machine Information 262 Self EC 264 cie EE 264 Billing vg e L el d ele WEE 265 TOE E E E E E E EEE 265 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 255 Machine and Job Status Introduction Introduction This guide explains how to use the Machine Status and Job Status functions These are both accessed by buttons on the control panel Job Status displays all the jobs in the job list waiting to be processed and the completed jobs Each list can be viewed by es TTT selecting the relevant tab owner Name CVillone H JobStatus doc 3 Printing BTV MachineStatus doc 4 Held Secure Print Active Jobs Completed Jobs U BTVu H JobStatus doc A Held Secure Print GKern H Special doc A Held Resources Required GKern Special doc A Held Pay For Print GKern Special doc A Held for Multiple Reasons Machine Status provides information Machine oe e Informa
192. its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your attorney ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 337 Safety and Regulations Copy Regulations Canada Parliament by stature has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 2 3 4 Current bank notes or current paper money Obligations or securities of a government or bank Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper The public seal of Canada or of a province or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada or of a court of law Proclamations orders regulations or appointments or notices thereof with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queens Printer for Canada or the equivalent printer for a province Marks brands seals wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province the government of a state other than Canada or a department board Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada Documents registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof where the copy falsely purpo
193. k Restart 308 R Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 341 Recipient 97 Reduce enlarge 11 Reduce Split 63 Refresh Templates 155 Remote Mailbox 68 Remote Polling 70 Repeat Image 39 Replaceable Units 310 Cleaning Unit 311 Ink Sticks 310 Staple Cartridges 311 Report Setting 283 Reports 65 108 116 120 168 294 303 Confirmation Multipoll Broadcast Activity 294 Print Confirmation Report 65 Repositories 148 Reset UI Setting 284 Resets 302 Resolution 59 85 102 154 167 Retrieve Saved Settings 45 Routine Care 312 S Safety Contact Information 346 Safety Labels and Symbols 329 Sample Set 43 Saturation 20 101 153 186 Save Current Settings 44 Saved Jobs 227 Printing Saved Jobs at the device 201 Saving Energy 308 Saving Jobs Create New Folder 205 Managing Folders 205 Modify or Delete Folder 205 Printing Saved Jobs from Internet Services 202 Using Internet Services 204 Using the Printer Driver 203 Saving Programing 44 Scan 229 Scan Presets 152 Scan to Home 173 Scan to Home Options 174 Scan to Mailbox 169 Scan to USB 212 Secure Faxes 75 Secure Polling 70 Security Settings 299 Selecting a Template 150 Send Header 67 Send to Mailbox 68 Server Fax Service 80 Service Settings 285 Services 115 Copy 10 E mail 180 Fax 50 Internet Fax 96 Server Fax 80 Workflow Scanning 148 Services Default 273 Services Home 10 50 80
194. l be folded as shown Select whether to have the image printed on the inside or outside of the fold and Collated for sets or Uncollated for stacks e Use the Original Orientation option to select the orientation of the originals being scanned Select Upright Images or Sideways Images The images will be rotated as required 16 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Copy Options Finishing Devices Your device is equipped with one of the following finishing devices High Volume Finisher The High Volume Finisher Tray 6 Post Process Inserter This optional has a comprehensive range of finishing options It collates offsets stacks and staples your output The top tray can receive up to 250 sheets of paper and the stacker tray up to 3000 sheets of paper This finisher can be fitted with the optional 2 3 or 4 Hole Punch kit and the Tray 6 Post Process Inserter kit Booklet Maker The High Volume Finisher is also available with a Booklet Maker which enables booklets to be folded and stapled Folded sheets and booklets are delivered to the booklet tray which can hold between 10 and 30 booklets depending upon the number of pages If the flap on the right of the tray is folded down an unlimited number of booklets can be collected in a suitable container Tri fold Module If you have a High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker a Tri fold module can also be fitted This enables your device to tri fold booklets With the Tri f
195. l legislation For Business Users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in Other Countries Outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the Battery Symbol This wheeled bin symbol may be used in combination with a chemical symbol This Hg establishes compliance with the requirements set out by the Directive Removal Batteries should only be replaced by a MANUFACTURER approved service facility 344 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Energy Program Compliance Energy Program Compliance All Markets ENERGY STAR The Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 is ENERGY START qualified under the ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment The ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR MARK are registered United States trademarks The ENERGY STAR Imaging Equipment Program is a team effort between U S European Union and Japanese governments and the office equipment industry to promote energy efficient copiers printers fax multifunction machine personal computers and monitors Reducing product energy consumption helps combat smog acid rain and long term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result
196. l panel 308 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Power Options If Quick Restart is selected and confirmed the device will restart Any copy jobs in the job list will be deleted print jobs in the job list are recovered If Cancel is selected the power down options will be cancelled and the device will be available for use Select Close to exit Energy Saver Options The device is designed to be energy efficient and automatically reduces its power consumption after periods of inactivity The System Administrator can setup the following Energy Saver options Intelligent Ready wakes up and sleeps automatically based on previous usage The device uses algorithms and data gathered on a usage profile to anticipate periods when the device is likely to be busy Using this information it automatically wakes up the device Job Activated wakes up when activity is detected Scheduled wakes up and sleeps at set times on a daily basis The device can be set to wake up when activity is detected or a specific time can be entered Fast Resume reduces the time taken to wake up This changes the default sleep low power timeouts and increases energy usage For information about setting up the Energy Saver options refer to the System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 9 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care General Care There are a number maintenance tasks which need to be performed to ensur
197. le Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this Xerox equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the appropriate service center details of which are displayed either on the machine or contained within the User Guide If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox Service Representative or an authorized Xerox Service provider This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period If unauthorized repair is performed the remainder of the warranty period is null and void This equipment must not be used on party lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line make sure that the installation of this Xerox equipment does not disable your alarm equipment I
198. le cartridges for the Office Finisher and the High Volume Finisher contain 5000 staples The High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker has 2 additional staple cartridges located within the Booklet Maker module Each of these cartridges holds 2000 staples ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 311 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Detailed instructions are provided on the touch screen Follow the instructions and labels provided when replacing the staple cartridge Office and High Volume Finisher Staple Cartridge 1 2 Open the finisher door If using the Office Finisher rotate the staple access handle a green cog clockwise until the staple unit is accessible Unlatch the staple cartridge using the light colored catch and remove the used staple cartridge Dispose of the staple cartridge according to the instructions contained in the new staple cartridge box Unpack the new staple cartridge and install into the finisher The staple cartridge clicks into place If using the Office Finisher rotate the staple access handle the green cog counter clockwise until back in position Close the finisher door High Volume Finisher Booklet Maker Staple Cartridges Open the finisher door Pull out the booklet maker module Lower the lever to gain access to the staple cartridges Grip the staple cartridge and pull it out of the staple head Dispose of the staple cartridge according to the instructions contained in the n
199. learable fault is declared to change the Cleaning Unit e Job Fault Messages indicate a fault with the job for example the required paper is unavailable If a job is paused because of a fault the user is required to take action to correct the condition or to delete the job Fault Displays All faults that affect the users of the device are presented to the user by one of two methods Interrupting Fault Interrupting faults are presented if the associated fault affects the entire device where the device is not capable of accepting input or output They are also presented if the associated fault affects the currently selected document service but does not affect another service which can still be used The type of fault screen presented depends on the type of fault occurring Some fault displays present the user with fault recovery options A selection of buttons allow you to choose a fault recovery option When an interrupting fault window is displayed any status messages associated with the displayed fault are presented in the Status Message area Non Interrupting Fault Non Interrupting fault displays consist of messages displayed in the Status Message area They do not affect the successful completion of a job from the current pathway For example if the user is running a Copy job and a fault occurs with faxing then a non interrupting fault display is presented Both Interrupting and Non Interrupting fault displays are genera
200. lect Save to enable Xerox Standard Accounting Network Accounting Network Accounting provides the ability to track usage of print copy scan and fax job services over the network It works with third party devices which are compatible with the Network Accounting function e Customize Prompts allows you to customize the prompts that are provided to the users e Code Entry Validation is used to check users accounting credentials prior to providing access to the accounting database Copy Activity Report Use this option to print a report after each copy session The report details the type of job and the number of copies made during the session This feature is intended for devices which are accessed by the general public and enables the user to be charged for the copies e Select Copy Activity Report Copy Activity Report e Select Enable to have the device print are DO rt at th een d of each CO py Enabling this feature will automatically generate a printed usage report of an individual s Pa completed Copier service session session Bare e Alternatively select Disable to turn P Disable this feature off 298 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Security Settings The Security Settings are used to manage the security features of the device Job Deletion rights and Image Overwrite Settings can be configured Detailed instructions for Security Settings are provided in the System Administrator Guid
201. lect the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu x Close e Local User 00 Account Name A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 207 Print From Log In Out 208 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 USB Port 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents Ih Sasa 9220202 neces RARE AE ES 212 SECON tO USD EEN 213 Pint sse H L BY 2a dececrnceuteaacscaneeeenabensbegaectoasieesberes Se vawewonseebwresewowane 214 Beie Blat OU EE 215 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 1 USB Port Introduction Introduction The ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 has a USB port which enables users to insert a USB Flash Drive and access jobs for printing or for storing scanned jobs When a USB Flash Drive is inserted into the USB port located on the left side of the device the USB Drive Detected screen is displayed To sca
202. lected If required modify the template settings using the options on the Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Layout Adjustment and Filing Options tabs 2 Sider Sc L RL For information about all the Auto Detect Si Photo 8 Text Sharing amp Printing Workflow Scanning options refer to Workflow Scanning Options on page 150 Press Start to scan the originals Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed The file is stored on your USB Flash Drive in the root directory Remove your USB Flash Drive from the USB port ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 213 USB Port Print from USB Print from USB You can print PDF TIFF JPEG XPS and other print ready files directly from a USB Flash Drive Note The system administrator must set up this feature before you can use it Refer to the System Administrator Guide for instructions To print from a USB Flash Drive 1 Insert your USB Flash Drive into the USB port located on the left side of the device The USB Drive Detected screen appears 2 Select Print from USB The Print From options are displayed 3 Select the folder required and the 7 use Drive print ready job required en Print From T USB Drive If necessary use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the list until 12 01 09 12 50 08 PM the folder or job iS displayed Desktop Folder 03 18 09 12 35 02 PM 11 07 07 9 28 28 AM Jupiter_workshop
203. les you to specify the appearance and Le On Error printing behaviour of these reports e GC amp Multipoll Report e Activity Report provide information on the fax activities which have occurred on the device e Auto Print is used to print an Activity Report automatically e Off is selected if the Activity Report is not required e Confirmation Report provides information on an individual transmission e Report Options is used to determine when the report prints Select Always Print to print after each transmission Off if a report is not required or Print On Error if the report is required only when an error occurs e Print Options is used to specify whether a Reduced Image of the first page or No Image is required on the Confirmation Report e Broadcast amp Multipoll Report provides a report when there is broadcast or multi poll fax activity e Always Print prints a report after each broadcast or multipoll fax transmission e Off switches off the report e Print On Error is selected if the report is required only when an error occurs e Select Close to return to the previous screen Print Fax Reports Use this option to print the fax reports The reports available are Activity Report Protocol Report Dial Directory Report Print Fax Reports Group Directory Report Options Report Activity Report and Pending Jobs Report Protocol Report e Select the report required then Print Dial Directory Report Now Group Direc
204. ligations or Securities of any Foreign Government Bank or Corporation 4 Copyrighted materials unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the fair use or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office Library of Congress Washington D C 20559 Ask for Circular R21 5 5 Certificate of Citizenship or Naturalization Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed 336 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations h i Copy Regulations Passports Foreign Passports may be photographed Immigration papers Draft Registration Cards Selective Service Induction papers that bear any of the following Registrant s information Earnings or Income Court Record Physical or mental condition Dependency Status Previous military service Exception United States military discharge certificates may be photographed 10 Badges Identification Cards Passes or Insignia carried by military personnel or by members of the various Federal Departments such as FBI Treasure etc Unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states Automobile Licenses Drivers Licenses Automobile Certificates of Title The above list is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for
205. lit Select Reduce Split to specify how your faxed document is printed if your document paper size is larger than the receiving fax machine s capabilities The options are e Reduce to Fit this option reduces the image to fit the paper size of the mf fie Spit rece ivi n g fax m ach i ne This feature determines how the receiving device will handle images that are too large Reduce e Split Across Pages this option splits to Fit eae the document into 2 equal parts or EI split Across Split Across Pages will continue a single image across several pages the majority of the image is put on to 1 page and the remainder on the next page Select Save to save your selections and exit Book Faxing A CAUTION Do Not close the document feeder when scanning bound originals Select Book Faxing to specify which page or pages of a book are to be scanned The book original is placed face down on the document glass with the spine of the book lined up with the marker on the rear edge of the glass Align the top of the bound original against the rear edge of the document glass ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 63 Fax Layout Adjustment The device will identify the size of the original during scanning If the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are To overcome this use the Custom Scan Area feature in Original Size to enter the exact size of the page Refer to Orig
206. lity eE Output Format Job Assembly Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output magnification ratios b i a 1 Staple e Alternatively you can select a paper man 0 SES 1 2 Sided Portrait STT tray that contains the size and type of me EI 2 2 Sided EE paper you require The size and type deduce eninge gessa b e Transparency 2 1 Sided Folding of media loaded in each tray is o C a Zeg l More otate Side ore displayed mo When the More button is selected the Paper Supply screen is displayed showing all the trays and the confirmed size and type of media loaded in each tray e A user can select which tray to use from this list The chosen tray is highlighted in blue e If the Auto Tray Switching feature has been enabled by your System Administrator and the same size and type of media is loaded in more than one tray the device will automatically switch from one tray to the other when media in the active tray runs out 2 Sided Copying The device provides options to make one or two sided copies from one or two sided originals using either the document feeder or the document glass The options are e 1 gt 1 Sided use this option if your glow Originals are printed on one side and N y C Image Quality l N NE Output Format Job Assembly Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output you want single sided copies F Bees e 1 gt 2 Sided use this option if your 6 G
207. loaded in the ii document feeder Use this option if your images are in the orientation matching the image shown when loaded in the document feeder e Portrait Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Portrait image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction e Landscape Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Landscape image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction Select Save to save your selections and exit 22 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Original Size Layout Adjustment Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11
208. ly Select to enable the printer to select og the paper size for the job e To select a paper size for the job deselect the checkbox and use the drop down menu Gutter e Use this option to shift the images to create a center margin for the booklet e This option provides space for the booklet center fold e Specify the horizontal distance in points between the page images A point is 1 72 or 35 mm Creep e This option gradually shifts the images throughout the document providing less shift in the center of the booklet and more shift to the outer pages of the booklet This is useful for booklets with more than 10 pages e Setting the Creep compensates for the thickness of the folded paper which otherwise might cause the page images to shift slightly outward when folded e Specify how much the page images are shifted outward in 10ths of a point Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be stapled punched or folded Refer to www xerox com for specifications information Print Quality The Print Quality affects the appearance of printed output and the time the job takes to print High Resolution e Use this option if printing high quality output or photos 132 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Paper Output High Speed Black and White only e This option is a high speed printing mode available for black and white printing only gt Itis the default setting for black and white printing and is recomme
209. matting e Held the job has been temporarily stopped from printing The job remains in the job list and continues to proceed up the list as prior jobs are printed If a held job is at the top of the list all subsequent jobs continue to be processed and printed A held job does not hold up other jobs in the list There are various reasons why a job might be held for example the job is a secure print or fax job or the required resources are not available The reason for the held status identified by selecting Job Details and Required Resources e Receiving the device is receiving the job through a network transmission e Deleted the job has been deleted from the job list e Completed with Errors the job was completed with errors e Select All Jobs and use the drop down list to filter the jobs and display only Copy Print and Fax Received Jobs or eee Scan Jobs and Fax Sent Jobs which All jobs BTVu rh JobStatus doc A Held Secure Print Active Jobs Completed Jobs GKern H Special doc A Held Resources Required GKern Special doc A Held Pay For Print GKern 4 Special doc A Held for Multiple Reasons Completed Jobs This option displays the jobs which have been completed on the device Up to 150 jobs can be displayed The Owner Name and Status of each job is shown e Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed Owner Name Status CVillone H JobStatus doc 3 Printing BTV Ma
210. mercury Perchlorate and other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations The presence of these materials is fully consistent with global regulations applicable at the time that the product was placed on the market For recycling and disposal information contact your local authorities Perchlorate Material This product may contain one or more Perchlorate containing devices such as batteries Special handling may apply please see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate European Union WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC Some equipment may be used in both a domestic household and a professional business application Professional Business Environment Application of this symbol on your equipment is confirmation that you must dispose of this equipment in compliance with agreed national procedures In accordance with European legislation end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be managed within agreed procedures Domestic Household Environment Application of this symbol on your equipment is confirmation that you should not dispose of the equipment in the normal household waste stream In accordance with European legislation end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be segregated from household waste Private households within EU member states may return used electrical and electronic equipment to designated collection facilities free of charge
211. more information Select the Save button The new entry is displayed in the list To amend an entry use the Edit Details option To delete the entry use the Clear Entry option Groups Group entries allow you to group individual entries under one number for regularly used broadcast transmissions When transmitting a fax you only have to enter the one group number to send to multiple destinations Fax numbers can only be added to a group if they are first entered as an individual entry 1 2 To create a Group entry select the Fax tab and the Address Book button Select the Groups option from the drop down menu Select an empty slot from the list of entries If necessary use the Up and Down buttons Enter the name of the Group in the Group Name field Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect entry or the Clear Text button to delete the entire entry Select Save Select the Add Recipients button to add recipients to the Group Fax Address Book B individuals Groups rour 002 Allen Iverson 003 Steve Nash B Group 004 Details Group Name Automatic Doors Ltd Speed Dial Name Fax Number pd po pO pd TT Recipients L L L Si Add Recipients ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax 55 Dialing Options D Individual or Group recipients can be added toa Group E anene To add an individual entry select 8 aar jl Individuals from the drop down menu Sele
212. n and store files on a USB Flash Drive select the Scan to USB option from HR cose the drop down menu The Workflow Please select operation Scanning options are displayed Select the options required for scanning and scan the job The job is stored in the USB Flash Drive root directory To print directly from a USB Memory Device insert the USB Flash Drive and select the Print from USB option from the drop down menu on the screen The Print From options are displayed Select the print ready file for printing and the options required then print the job Instructions for using the basic features are provided in the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How To Sheets 212 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 USB Port Scan to USB Scan to USB You can insert a USB Flash Drive into the device scan a document and store the scanned file on the USB Flash Drive Note The system administrator must set up this feature before you can use it Refer to the System Administrator Guide for instructions To scan to a USB Flash Drive 1 2 Load the original documents in the document feeder or on the document glass Insert your USB Flash Drive into the USB port located on the left side of the device The USB Drive Detected screen appears Select Scan to USB Workflow Ko layout CS Filing G Scanning Settings i Ke Options Assembly The Workflow Scanning options are Details for USB displayed and the USB Store template Serge is se
213. n empty entry and use the keyboard to enter up to 8 alpha numeric characters Alternatively to edit an existing prefix highlight the prefix in the list and select the Edit button Use the keyboard to edit the entry and select Save to close the keyboard 7 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required 8 Program the Format amp Style options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 38 for instructions 9 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 37 Copy Output Format Format and Style Once you have programed the Annotations required use the following instructions to select the format and style required 1 38 Select the Output Format tab Annotations button and then Format lt Annotations amp Style Specify the appearance of annotated text Use the arrow buttons to enter the Date 1 1 2005 abi23___AaBb 9 Format amp Style VehiclelD5 8 Black Same as Side 1 Format amp Style Text Background Opaque the annotated text is placed on the copy output with a A IB BE white border No copy text is GE visible under the annotated text seen Mirror Side 1 Flip On Horizontal Transparent the annotated text 7 Font Point Size iror t is placed on the copy outputso i that the copy text is visible under e g the annotate
214. n fax number or numbers Select the appropriate dialing option for your fax job To access the Dialing Options select Services Home and Fax Dialing Options The dialing options enable you to enter the destination fax number or numbers Select the appropriate dialing option for your fax job To access the Dialing Options select Services Home and Fax Manual Dialing 1 Select the fax number field and enter SS the fax number required using the 0 numeric keypad nit ee 2 If special characters are required use the Dialing Characters option to E Book enter the number plus additional Orcover sheet dialing characters Refer to Dialing p Characters on page 52 3 Select Add to add the number to the recipient list Enter additional numbers as required c Layout Fax Job Adjustment Options Assembly Image Quality 4 To amend the Recipient List e Select the entry in the list If necessary use the scroll bar to access all the entries e Use Edit to amend the entry Use Remove to delete the entry from the list or Remove All to delete all entries If removing an entry a confirmation screen is displayed The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the recipient list Speed Dialing If numbers have been entered into the a oa E Address Book they can be accessed via a ees ter number and press Layout Job Adjustment Options Assembly Speed Dial number Each entry in the Se wl sosea oi
215. n is used to define the resolution to use for scanning the original The higher the scanning resolution the better the image quality although a larger image file is created Build Job allows you to build a job that requires different settings for each page or a segment of pages or has more originals that can be scanned in the document feeder at one time Quality File Size allows you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network Select Edit to change the options Select Apply to save the selections and exit Layout Adjustment These options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style of your filed image The following options are available Original Orientation is used to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned Original Size is used to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image Edge Erase is used to erase spots unwanted lines marks and punched holes that appear on your original but are not required on the scanned image Fili
216. n list Watermark Editor Test Print v 180 270 360 50 75 100 Position from center Horizontal 2 C Inches Millimeters Preview Options Letter 8 5 11 ES Portrait Ke Color v Picture uses a picture as the watermark The picture can be in Bitmap GIF or JPG format Specify the file name in the File Name field or select the Choose File button to browse to the picture that you want to use Font if you selected Text or Time Stamp select this option to access the Font screen to change the font family style and size to use for the text Color if you selected Text or Time Stamp select this option to access the Color screen to change the color to use for the text Angle if you selected Text or Time Stamp either specify an angle or move the slider to select the angle of the text on the page The default angle is 45 degrees Scale if you selected Picture either specify the percentage or move the slider to select the percentage to scale the picture Density either specify a density for the watermark or move the slider to select the density The default density is 25 percent ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 141 Print Layout Watermark e Use Position from center to select the number of inches or millimeters to shift the watermark from the center of the page or select the Center option to center the watermark e Preview Options selects the paper size and orientation to use for the preview image of
217. n of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ag dee 2 0 20 148 REDO ONOS Gon nec nutcase E E 0220000002 20 02202000 0822200000 148 EE eebe EE EE 149 Workflow Scanning Options 150 399 150 8 150 2 05 EE E E E 151 lieler WK EE 151 SOOM AE 152 Advanced Settings 0 153 age 153 Me EIO ME 154 OIT 154 daalt 8 155 Update Templates EEN 155 156 gt Original OnentQuOnt 2 22 156 157 Selen e E 158 oesie erenn aes ther A ee ae eae nae Neem ea Onde duende none eeaeeeass 159 0 SU EEN 159 Ee ebe EELER 159 e EEN 160 ke Document Management 161 161 Add File JOO PGSEMIONW EE 162 DUNC BT WEE 162 ISNA SSIES AATE AT ASEET REEE 163 0 New Templates ENER 163 Modifying a Template 164 164 M giele RR ui e EE 165 Siet MAIG OX EE 169 2 169 Using Scan ge ee EEN 170 DEO LO e eu DEE 173 Be CANTO ROME EE 173 BO TOU 8 176 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 147 Workflow Scanning Introduction Introduction Workflow Scanning i
218. n required or printed from Internet Services Type a name for the job or select Use Document Name to use the file name Select Print and Save to print a copy of the job at the device Select Public or Private to specify the folder to use for the saved job This determines whether the job is available to other users or in a private folder If the job requires a passcode enter the passcode required This passcode is required to print the job Note To save jobs on the printer Job Storage must be enabled in the Installable Options screen Fax use this option to send the current job as a Fax from PC job The job is sent from the PC to the printer over the network then faxed over a telephone line to the specified fax destination When you select this job type the Fax screen is displayed so you can specify the fax recipients and specify other fax settings Refer to the Fax from PC guide for more information Note To fax your job the fax option must be installed on your printer and fax must be enabled in the Installable Options screen Paper Output Delay Print CG Time to Print Saved Job Je Job Name Use Document Name E L Folder Default Public Folder Ah H Print and Save Public Co Private D Passcode 4 10 Digita ef Confirm Passcode 4 10 Digits Fax Humber Organization ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 129 Print Paper Output Paper This option displays information about the paper t
219. n the job is received Once the receipt is received by the device the report is compiled and printed Note The report may be delayed depending on how quickly the FF Acknowledgement Report we JL ee D D TOC p ie nt 5 res DO d This feature will wait for a delivery receipt from each recipient of the Internet s Fax job and will print a report containing the delivery status of each if known off Note The report may be delayed due to the recipient s response time Pri nt Re po rt Print Report e The device requests a receipt from each of the recipients when the Internet Fax is sent e Once the recipient s acknowledge receipt the report is compiled and printed automatically Select Save to save your selections and exit 108 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Internet Fax Then select the Job Assembly tab Job Assembly O Build Job Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or asegment of pages a Su Ess 2 You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text and 2 sl Renz EE complete
220. nd Select Delay Send to specify the time within the next 24 hours that you want the fax to be transmitted Use this feature to transmit faxes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone Delay Send can also be used with Mailbox and Polling options The options are Specified Time e Select Specified Time and select either the Hour or the Minute field to KADE enter a time to send your fax gt Use the arrow buttons or numeric ER Si E e s keypad to enter the hours and ee maf mae va minutes Curren t Time 3 30 PM e Ifthe device is set up to display the time using a 12 hour clock you must also select either the AM or PM button e Select Save and program and scan the fax job The fax will be stored in memory and sent at the specified time 90 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Job Assembly tab Job Assembly Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or asegment of pages a Ess 2 You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text
221. nd can be shared with other people The Shared LDAP option will be linked to your company phonebook if you have one Select the phonebook required The system retrieves the phonebook information and the entries are displayed e Type a name or select the name required from the list e Use the green arrow to add a recipient to the list from the phonebook e Use the Edit button to edit an entry e Use the Delete button to delete an entry from the list 5 When you have selected all the options you require select OK to continue making selections for the job Preferences The Preferences screen enables you to setup your Phonebooks and display preferences to suit your own requirements ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 117 Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Phonebook Preferences Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open Pear D Decenii and Settings h nkt Mp De Select the Preferences button at the bottom of the Fax Recipients screen to Steet ot access the Phonebook Preferences screen D Sharad LOAF Personal Phonebook information is stored in files with a suffix of pb User Preferences You can create numerous files of this type and select them as your 2 personal phonebook They will then appear as phonebook options on EE the Add From Phonebook screen You can create a personal or shared Ce a Deen Phonebook Edta phone
222. nd functions of Internet Services ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 233 Internet Services Help 234 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents uge e D egen BEE 238 coh cmd Wel gis ae ee ee ee ee eee eS ee 239 Loading Trays Tand Z EE 240 TONY EE 241 Loading TAY EE 241 TOV e EE 242 Loading Tray 4 Bypass 0c ccc ccc ccc ee ene cece een n eee en 242 be VE 244 Eet sie TN EE 244 WG CUS SRD 02002 0 2 00 0003002 245 Loading Tray 6 INSEE EE 245 Velo WE EE 247 Ae un NEE 247 PRO s 5 247 tels ea 20 2 22 E ES EE EE EEEE 248 E Nya EE 248 Lee e EE 248 LADE oaae r ee ee eee 249 Heavyweight and Extra Heavyweight 249 Meet Ke le EE 249 PHVGIODES H H EROE 250 Storage and Handling EE 252 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 237 Paper and Media Introduction In
223. nd transmitting over the network degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals 9 Small File e Highest Quality produces the largest Size files with the maximum image quality Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network e Higher Quality produces larger files with better image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit Note If you change the Quality File Size option you may affect the settings in the Scan Presets options on the Workflow Scanning tab Update Templates The Update Templates feature retrieves new or updated templates or workflow E annie and removes outdated items from the list EE e Update Now retrieves updated P p Note Automatic template updates can be scheduled using configuration web pages associated with this template information immediately Status e Select the Confirm option to confirm EE an update is required e Select Close Note Selecting this option may cause a delay and the Workflow Scanning service will be unavailable for several minutes The delay does not affect the other services available on the device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 155 Workflow Scanning Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you Re wae Aas IHI aa to manipulate the scanned image and EE SE enhance the appearance and style of your output To access the Layout Adjustment option
224. nded for most office uses and quick prints Enhanced Color only gt This is the default option when color printing is selected e Itisahigh quality printing mode for fine lines and detail e Recommended for vibrant saturated color prints Note The print job may take longer to process when printed in Enhanced print quality mode Transparencies are always printed in Standard print quality mode Standard e This option is a high speed general purpose printing mode for crisp bright color prints e Recommended for most office uses and quick color prints Fast Color e This provides the fastest full color mode It is useful for text images and for previewing work It rapidly produces review documents and is useful for rush jobs e Use with standard sized paper in Paper Tray 1 e Not recommended for documents containing small text fine detail or large areas of bright solid Fill Output Destination e Use this option to select the destination for your output from the tray choices in the drop down menu e Use Automatically Select to send the printed output to a destination based on the paper size Note If a destination appears in gray text it may not be available due to other settings that you have selected ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 133 Print Special Pages Special Pages The Special Pages tab enables you to add modify or delete cover pages inserts or exception pages The table provides a summary of the spec
225. ng The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned 62 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Sa Original Size Auto Detect Proset Scan Areas You are specifying the E SE area that will be scan Area scanned Mixed Size Originals KA ey Original size Auto Detect Pres 6 Scan Areas Custom EI Scan Area Mized Sige Originals You are specifying the area that will be Schung Layout Adjustment e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different Ha Original Size size pages The pages must be the The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF le 0 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other e Auto Detect combinations are shown on the 9 DE screen The device will detect the size of the scan Area documents and determine whether the receiving fax machine can support the various paper sizes If the receiving fax cannot support the page sizes the image is reduced or enlarged to fit Select Save to save your selections and exit Reduce Sp
226. ng Options These options are used to specify the document name and file format used to store the scanned images The following options are available Document Name enables you to name the file that will be stored File Format determines the type of file created and can be temporarily changed for the current job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 167 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates File Name Extension This option is used to specify if the file name extension uses lower or upper case characters for example pdf or PDF Report Options These options are used to enable the confirmation sheet and job log e Confirmation Sheet provides information about the success of the scanning job and prints at the device when the job has completed e Job Log allows you to print a list of the last jobs that the system has completed processing Workflow Scanning Image Settings These settings are used to set the image optimization the searchable options and the compression settings The following options are available e Optimized for Fast Web Viewing these options are used to set the device to optimise the image file for viewing on a website e Searchable Options are used to select if the file content is searchable and the language options e Text Compression allows you to enable the text to be compressed if the file format output is PDF or PDF A 168 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Scan to Mailbox Scan to Mailbox
227. ng option The Workflow Scanning features are displayed Select your private folder template from the templates list Enter your folder password using the keyboard The template settings are updated to internet Fax your customized settings defined when the folder was created Make programing changes to Output pm Color 2 Sided Scanning Original Sas Type and Scan Presets as required WY ai Tempiates FAX Destination configured Pre programmed Job Assembly Refer to Workflow Scanning Options on page 150 for more information Additional Workflow Scanning options are provided on each of the tabs Refer to the following sections for further information e Advanced Settings on page 153 e Layout Adjustment on page 156 e Filing Options on page 159 e Job Assembly on page 162 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Workflow Scanning job Remove the originals from the document feeder or glass when scanning has completed The Workflow Scanning job enters the job list ready for filing Select Job Status to view all the job lists and check the status of your job Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for more information The scanned images are filed in your private folder and are accessed using Internet Services To access Internet Services open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed e Be ER jew Faverite Jak Help by the IP Address of the device For 0 0 EE aT 8
228. ng the staple cartridge Remove any partially used staple strips and any staple strips that are not flat Reinstall the Stapler Cartridge High Volume Finisher If a problem occurs in the Finisher Stapler remove the Staple Cartridge and release any misfed staples Refer to Staple Cartridges on page 311 for instructions on removing the staple cartridge If the Staple Cartridge is not at the front of the device power the device Off and On using the On Off switch at the side of your device Remove any partially used staple strips and any staple strips that are not flat Reinstall the Staple Cartridge High Volume Finisher Booklet Maker Stapler If a problem occurs in the Booklet Maker Staplers remove both Stapler Cartridges and release any misfed staples Refer to Staple Cartridges on page 311 for instructions on removing the staple cartridge Remove any partially used staples from the Stapler Cartridges and Stapler Heads Reinstall the Stapler Cartridges Document Feeder Problems Document feeder misfeeds can occur in the document feeder The device has designated document feeder clearance areas If a misfeed occurs a message and clearance instructions are displayed on the touch screen There are also labels showing how to clear each area If misfeeds persist or occur intermittently check the following points Check the top cover of the document feeder is firmly closed Check your originals Ensure that your originals are of a
229. nter a field label and a default value if required If user input is required select User Input Required Select Mask User Input if the data entered is confidential such as a passcode If details of the entry must be added to the log select Record User Input to Job Log 4 Select Apply to save the field entry Workflow Scanning These options are used to set the basic options for a job The options are e Output Color provides selectionsto asm automatically detect and match the Be color of your original or produce monotone full color or a single color output from your original e 2 Sided Scanning allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document will be scanned and then filed e Content Type is used to define the type of original being used for scanning e How Original was Produced is used to select the production method of the original e Scan Presets are used to optimise scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents Advanced Settings These settings provide advanced scanning options used to adjust image quality select the file size and enhance the image 166 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning The following options are available Creating Templates Image Options are used to adjust the image quality applied to the scanned document Image Enhancement is used to select an image quality setting appropriate for your originals Resolutio
230. number e Long Pause I use to enter a long pause between numbers e Mask Data use to protect confidential information For example if a special charge code or credit card number is required for a call simply use the Mask Data character Select the character before entering confidential numbers After the last confidential number select again to turn the mask data off Characters between the symbols will appear as ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 81 Server Fax Dialing Options e Group Dial use to add another fax number to the entry if the fax is being transmitted to multiple recipients e Pulse to Tone use to switch between pulse and tone dialing e Password Check S use for remote terminal identification This character verifies that the correct number has been dialled e Wait for Network Tone W suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service e Optional Readability Character this is used for readability purposes and does not affect the number entered For example if you wish to identify the area code of a fax number use the Readability Character 01234 567890 If an incorrect entry is made use the left right arrows to navigate through the number and use the C button to delete a character Use Clear Text to delete all the characters 3 When you have entered the fax number and dialing characters re
231. o Contrast Image Options Image Options is used to change the 0 appearance of the output image The Image Options options are e Lighten Sharpen e Lighten Darken provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images 2 Move the indicator down to darken the image or up to lighten the image e Sharpness provides manual control to Darken adjust the sharpness of the scanned images Move the indicator up to sharpen the image Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by P imase Enhancement 9 JI 9 reducing the background or adjusting the EE contrast The options are D L Manual Contrast e Background Suppression enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper Auto Suppression oe Auto Contrast lt Normal e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background 60 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Image Quality Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound
232. o Detect wp Black amp White In eee Fax Layout Job Adjustment Option Assembly Address Book From s jones xerox c Subject ES Friday s Deadline Kaer o rnn Color rnn amp White Original Type Photo amp Text 2 Sided Scanning 99 1 Sided ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Internet Fax 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to v eit at Fax Settings Adjustment Options set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned The options are Recipient Book d ee pp a DIO s xerox com s jones xerox c documents are single sided SC EE tert Eas To j smith xerox com Ca r pat xerox com e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Ce See SE e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your Black amp White 1 Sided Photo amp Text original opens up like a calendar The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Subject Friday s Deadline EES G Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for Se BEE SE _ EE 3 ae Fax Settings Adjustment iptions Assembly Originals containing high quality photographs and halftones Using Reci
233. o use for the print job such as size and type To change the paper to use for printing select the Paper drop down menu The options are e Other Size select this option to display the Paper Size Paper Size screen Select the paper size and scaling amount rem required e Other Color use this option to select a paper color forthe 7 Co print job Select a color from the drop down menu e Automatically Select use to enable the printer to select a color Original Document Size A4 210 297 mm A e Other Type use this option to select a type of paper or Original Document Orientation media to use for the print job Fang J Center OK OK Cancel _ Select a paper type from the drop down menu e Automatically Select use to enable the printer to select a type e Select by Tray use this option to select a specific tray for printing the job The printer only uses the paper in the selected tray even when more than one tray contains the same paper size and type e Use Automatically Select to enable the printer to select a tray loaded with the size and type of paper selected for the job Transparency Separators EE Select this option to display the Transparency Separators Paper Summary screen If this option is selected a blank or printed sheet is oo placed after each transparency The paper type for your job Printer Default Type must be set to Transparency using the Other Type menu option Separator Options
234. oblems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Printer makes a tearing or ripping noise as Reprint the job paper exits and part of the image may be Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality missing from the page Problems on page 320 for instructions A skewed or crooked image is produced when e Reprint the job copying or scanning from the document glass Make sure the defect is not on the original ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 321 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Potential Solution A skewed or crooked image is produced when Reprint the job copying or scanning from the document feeder Make sure the defect is not on the original and document glass Use originals within specification Refer to www xerox com for specifications information Make sure originals are correctly loaded in the document feeder Smears and smudges appear on the output Reprint the job when copying or scanning from the document Make sure the defect is not on the original glass or document feeder Clean the document glass and the Constant Velocity Transport CVT glass Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Smears and smudges appear on the output Reprint the job when printing or copying Make sure paper is the correct type and size and is properly loaded in the tray Make sure you select the 2nd side option in the option
235. old module fitted the capacity of the finisher stacker tray is reduced to 2000 sheets Refer to Folding on page 15 for information about the folding options Note Thick stacks of paper can be removed from your finisher more easily by using the pause function Press the button as shown to lower the stacker tray to a more convenient height Then press the button again to return the stacker tray to normal height Alternatively it automatically resets after 30 seconds accessory is a feeder that sits on top of the finisher unit It enables pre printed sheets to be inserted into sets created by your device The inserted sheets do not go through the copy or print process in the device For more information about using Tray 6 Inserter refer to the Paper and Media guide Office Finisher This finisher is capable of receiving up to 250 sheets of paper in the top tray and up to 2000 sheets of paper in the stacker tray The Office Finisher can be fitted with the optional 2 3 or 4 Hole Punch Kit Offsetting Catch Tray OCT The Offsetting Catch Tray holds up to 500 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb paper and is located on the right hand side of the device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 17 Copy Copy Options Convenience Stapler This optional device is used to manually staple documents Documents can be stapled straight or at an angle The Convenience Stapler can staple between 2 sheets of 64 gsm 18 lb and 50 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb The Sta
236. ompleted 162 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Job Assembly ag SI IER z llna Various More than sized 100 pages originals Program Next Submit the Job Seaman Delete All Segments Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned After the last segment has been scanned select Submit the Job to indicate you have finished Creating Templates Creating Templates Templates can be created modified and deleted using the Internet Services option on your device Template operations can only be performed once your System Administrator has defined the repositories and the default template This operation is performed within Internet Services To access Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For d LD Ei 6 24 i Teach p Feet Ei example If the IP Address is S IAT 192 168 100 100 enter the following ie a a XEROX ColorQube 9303 into the URL field l sa jobs Print scan Address Gook Properties Support http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for ins
237. on absorbent surfaces should be contained using suitable absorbent material Following containment suitable absorbing material diatomaceous earth or other silica based liquid absorbent should be used to soak up the spillage Clean any residual slippery coating using a strong detergent soap solution and apply sand or other inert granular material to improve traction Dispose of all waste material in accordance with national local state or federal regulations which are applicable When the Cleaning Unit is nearing end of life a warning message is displayed informing you to reorder a new unit but not to replace at this time The warning is given when there is approximately 13 days usage remaining When the Cleaning Unit reaches end of life and must be replaced another message is displayed The unit must be changed for the printer to operate Replace the unit using the instructions provided on the touch screen and within the packaging of the new unit Recycle the old unit as directed on the packaging or your local Xerox Representative Note The warning period can be customized by the System Administrator using Tools or Internet Services Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information Staple Cartridges If your device is equipped with the Office Finisher or High Volume Finisher you will be required to replace the staple cartridge or cartridges when the device displays a message instructing you to do so The stap
238. on is selected For further information refer to the System Administrator Guide Measurements This utility enables you to set the device to display measurements either in millimeters or inches and the numeric separator as a period full stop or a C hes D comma 123 456 78 comma mm Ri Period 123 456 78 e Units is used to select Inches or mm millimeters as the unit of measure Ba N Measurements e Numeric Separator is used to define which character is used to separate numbers select Comma or Period Paper Size Preference This option is used to select the most frequently used paper size formats e Inches for formats such as 8 5x11 or 11x17 e Metric for formats such as A4 or A3 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 273 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Audio Tones The device generates three types of audio tones to notify the user of an event that has occurred at the device Use this feature to switch off or adjust the volume of each of the tones e Fault Tone sounds when there is a fault on the device Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test option to hear the tone selected Audio Tones Fault Tone e Conflict Tone sounds when an incorrect touch screen selection has been made Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test option to hear the tone selected e Selection Tone sounds when the device accepts your selection Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test
239. on of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 Obligations or Securities of the United States Government such as Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA etc Bonds U S Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds Internal Revenue Stamps If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes Postage Stamps canceled or uncanceled For philatelic purposes Postage Stamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75 or more than 150 of the linear dimensions of the original Postal Money Orders Bills Checks or Draft of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States Stamps and other representatives of value of whatever denomination which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress 2 Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars 3 Ob
240. on the image Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the More setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Less setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Auto Contrast to automatically set the contrast level depending on the original being scanned ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 87 Server Fax Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you E see 00 S Fe LLL to manipulate the scanned image and ial enhance the appearance and style of your faxed document To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Orientation O Original Size Upright Images Auto Detect Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The options are e Upright Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the k Original Orientation document feeder Use this option if Upright mages and Sideways Images refer to e e direction the images are loaded in the your images are in the orientation Upright images matching the image shown when SE Sideways Images selections you can load the originals either upright or sideways and the device will rotate it appropriately loaded in the document feeder
241. ontinue to the next screen e Get IP Address from a DHCP Server is used if you want to have an IP address automatically assigned to this device e Use a Static IP Address is used if you know the IP address you want to assign to the device e Select the option required then select Next to continue to the next screen e Enter the IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Host Name and Gateway information by selecting each of the fields in turn A numeric keypad is displayed for numeric entries or a keyboard is displayed for text entries e Select Next to continue to the next screen A completion screen is displayed with instructions for printing a configuration report if required Select Done to exit e Select another option to program or select Close to return to the previous screen 282 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Contact Numbers Use to enter your Customer Support and Supplies Telephone numbers which are displayed on the device Ce Contact Numbers Enter your Customer Support and Supplies Telephone Numbers in the fields on the left e Customer Support Number is selected to enter the Xerox Support E number supplied with your device www Enter the number using the keyboard and select Save To delete an incorrect character entry use the backspace key or to delete the entire entry select Clear e Supplies Number is selected to enter the telephone number you call to obta
242. option enables S Bursie you to create edit and delete mailboxes Chen There is also a facility to print a list of all os nenn guinis S The Mailbox List displays the list of e mailboxes available on the system If a mailbox has already been setup and assigned a user a name the name is displayed next to the mailbox number e Edit is used to setup or amend an individual mailbox Select the mailbox required from the Mailbox List and select Edit e Mailbox Passcode is used to enter a 4 digit passcode required to access the mailbox Mailbox Setup e Mailbox Name is used to enter a name for the mailbox e g the owner department or group Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character entry or Delete Text to delete the entire entry e Mailbox Notification is enabled to provide notification of faxes received into the mailbox If disabled no notification is provided ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 293 Administration and Accounting Service Settings e Delete Mailbox is used to delete a mailbox which has already been setup A confirmation screen displays a warning that the mailbox and its contents are deleted if Confirm is selected e Print Mailbox List is used to print a list of all the mailboxes available on the system Setup Fax Reports There are 3 fax reports available Activity Report Confirmation Report and VEER Broadcast amp MultiPoll Report This option e Activity Report e Confirmation Report enab
243. options for matching payed EDE the printer s colors as closely as possible to colors on other devices such as oe gg computer screen or a printing press or converting the colors to grayscale C Print Settings On Page Color Uses the best color correction for each graphic element text artwork and photographs in your print job Vivid Color Produces brighter and more saturated colors Black and White Converts the colors to grayscale Use when you want to produce a black and white version of a document Custom Color Options This option provides 3 tabs for customizing and adjusting color settings e Color By Words Use this option to select and customize specific colors e Color Correction Use this option to adjust the colors using Color Correction settings e Color Adjustments Use this option to adjust the lightness contrast saturation and color cast scales ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 137 Print Color Options Print Settings on the Page Prints the filename print quality mode and color settings of the print job on the edge of the page 138 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Layout Watermark Layout Watermark The Layout Watermark tab contains settings for selecting page layout booklet layout and watermark options Paper Output Special Pages Color Options Layout Watermark Advanced Page Layout some features are only supported by ee specific printer configurat
244. options to instruct the system how to proceed if the Auto Reduce Enlarge feature is selected Select Auto Rotate as needed to allow automatic rotation or Disable Rotation to restrict the device from rotating the image e Use the When Auto Paper Selected options to instruct the system how to proceed if Auto Paper is selected Select Auto Rotate as needed to allow automatic rotation or Disable Rotation to restrict the device from rotating the image Embedded Fax Settings Select the Embedded Fax Settings option ee ane to access the following settings EE Device Settings Embedded Fax Settings e Fax Setup on page 288 Service Settings Features e Feature Defaults on page 285 2 S Network Settings Fax Setup Fax Country Setting on poge289 fitter 2 Feature Defaults Uy Accounting Settings darasa S Incoming Fax Defaults on page 290 e Transmission Defaults on page 291 e Mailbox amp Polling Policies on page 293 e Mailbox Setup on page 293 e Setup Fax Reports on page 294 e Print Fax Reports on page 294 Fax Setup Use this setting to Enable or Disable Embedded Fax e Enable activates the Embedded Fax service and is selectable from the Services Home screen e Disable switches off the service and it is not available for selection 288 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Feature Defaults Use to select the default settings for each
245. or your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 169 Workflow Scanning Scan to Mailbox 8 Select Scan and select Mailboxes eege e eg Create Folder from the display options The Scan to Mailbox options are displayed Select Create Folder and enter the folder name a password and confirm the password Select Apply The new folder is created and is displayed in the folder list To access the private folder and customize the options enter the folder password Select Personalise Settings to customize the scanning selections using the Edit option Select Apply after customizing each option When you have finished customizing your scanning options select Back to return to the Folder Contents screen To change your folder password or delete the folder use the Modify Folder option Your private folder is now setup and will display in the templates list when Workflow Scanning is selected on the device Using Scan to Mailbox 1 170 Load the original documents in the document feeder or on the document glass Press the Clear All AC button twice and then Confirm to cancel any previous screen programing selections ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning 10 11 Scan to Mailbox Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanni
246. otone Recipient oo output regardless of the color of your Lem original markjudd xerox e Grayscale to use gray scales instead Subject e Color to select color output from your original ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 183 E mail E mail Options 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to Les BEE GE VE y Settings Adjustment Options set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned The options are 6 Gs e 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your original Subject documents are double sided The EES document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option gu e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your Color original opens up like a calendar The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for Les Originals containing high quality photographs and halftones Using Recipient this setting the scanned image will contain medium quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line Layout E mail Adjustment Options Subject art is slightly reduced e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos magazine pictures or continuous
247. over sheet Fax number the number of the sending fax device This information is added automatically to the cover sheet ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Dialing Options To select a Cover Sheet 1 Select the Cover Sheet button and select On Cover Sheet Select the To field and enter the name of the recipient using the Hi er keyboard on e Upto 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered 1 This is Commentl 2 This is Comment2 3 This is Comment3 gt To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text Off gt e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards e Select Save Select the From field and enter the name of the recipient using the keyboard and select Save Select the comment required from the list If a customized comment is required p select an lt Available gt comment and use Edit to enter the text required S Then select Save Cover Sheet To delete a comment from the list select the comment and select Clear A confirmation screen is displayed select Confirm The cleared comment becomes lt Available gt Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 57 Fax Fax Fax These Fax options provide access to fax features which are required for programing basic fax jobs To access the Fax options select Services Home and Fax The Fax tab is displayed E Layou
248. own menu on the nn right 4 When you have made your selections select Save to save your selections and run the job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 41 Copy Job Assembly Job Assembly Use the Job Assembly 0 prions to poo Bal Copy Image Quality leren Output Format Job Assembly a job that requires individual selections for f er gt O Build Job sample Job Save Current Settings Specific pages or sections produce a Sample Set before printing the whole job 5 or for storing and retrieving frequently run p ro g ra m S Retrieve Saved Settings Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or a segment of pages a Ess J 2 You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text and 2 sl Renz EE completed job First split the originals into Eis with SE RES photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button 2 Select Display this window between i pir pagan Next segments to view the Build Job screen Ee UKE OR during scanning Then select Save Quanity lor 3 Select the options required for the a first segment of the job 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start core between segments 5 Remove the first segment
249. pean Union A WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The CE mark applied to this product symbolizes Xerox s declaration of conformity with the C 6 following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated e December 12 2006 Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment 334 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Basic Regulations e December 15 2004 Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004 108 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility e March 9 1999 Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC This product if used properly in accordance with the user s instructions is neither dangerous for the consumer nor for the environment To ensure compliance with European Union regulations use shielded interface cables A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this product can be obtained from Xerox Turkey RoHS Regulation In compliance with Article 7 d We hereby certify It is compliant with the EEE Regulation EEE y netmeli ine uygundur ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 335 Safety and Regulations Copy Regulations Copy Regulations United States Congress by statute has forbidden the reproducti
250. pen the door Opening the tray automatically lowers an elevator in the base of the tray Wait for the paper tray to lower The media required is displayed on the screen Ensure the correct media is loaded Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the right side of the tray e Load pre printed paper face down and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line Close the door When the door is closed the elevator rises to feed the media ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Tray 6 Inserter Tray 6 Inserter Tray 6 Inserter is an optional paper tray for use with the High Volume Finisher and is used for inserting post process sheets in the set This tray provides a very convenient and efficient way of adding pre printed covers or inserts to a job The following media can be loaded in Tray 6 Inserter e Upto 250 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper e Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb e Media sizes e A4or 8 5x11 SEF or LEF e 8 5x13 SEF e 8 5x14 SEF e A3or11x17 SEF e Media types e Bond standard or recycled paper e Card e Pre printed media e Hole punched paper e Clear transparencies Tray 6 Inserter must not be used to feed labels envelopes tabs or carbonless paper Tray 4 Bypass can be used for these media types Loading Tray 6 Inserter
251. phic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ak gail e lt WEE 200 PUNE ei DEE 201 Using the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 2 0 kk cnc cee e teen eens 201 Using Internet Services 0 ccc ce eee nee eee ene n teen eee eeenes 202 Saving Jobs for use with Print From 203 Using the Print RTE 203 Using Internet Services 204 Managing Saved Jobs de idbede tebsdntoeeineseweeewevewetesesads 205 BOO UNS OU 207 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 199 Print From Introduction Introduction Print From is a standard feature that can be enabled If enabled it is selected by pressing the Services Home button then the Print From option Print From enables you to print jobs which have been stored on the device or on a USB Flash Drive K Jobs can be stored on the device using the ee Print Driver or Internet Services Print Submission Stored jobs are placed into a folder located on the device Stored jobs can be recalled and printed as many times as you need To print directly from a USB Memory Device insert the USB Flash Drive and select the Print from USB option from the drop down menu on the screen The Print From options are displayed Select the print ready file for printing and the options required then print the job If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the
252. pient SE this setting the scanned image will contain medium quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line 5 EES e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos magazine pictures Photo amp Text To j bloggs xerox com S Newspaper FJ Magazine or continuous tones without any text mm oreu coor iil Black amp White 1 Sided Photo amp Text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Map is used if your original is a map or contains intricate line art and text e Newspaper Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text How the Original was Produced e Printed Original is for originals that have come from a magazine book or newspaper or that have been printed on a large printing device e Photocopied Original is for originals that are photocopies e Photograph is for high quality photographic originals e Inkjet Original is for originals that have been produced using an inkjet printer e Solid Ink Original is for originals produced by a solid ink printing process such as output from this device 100 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Advanced Settings Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access to Jpm aee the features which enhance the image quality or output qu
253. ple Cartridge holds 5 000 staples e Touse the Convenience Stapler hold your documents face up and slide the corner to be stapled into the stapler During stapling the indicator light on the top of the stapler is lit gt The stapler automatically staples the documents 18 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Image Quality Image Quality This section describes how to enhance the WE a WEE Image Quality Adjustment Output Format Assembly quality of your output and the options original Type O image Options Dimage Enhancement available Options enable you to set the Photo and Text el Normal ee Off the type of original adjust the lightness S ees Seen homme darkness contrast and sharpness of the image and also to customize the settings 200 r D e for color output el m Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being copied Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output The options are Content Type e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality FE original Type photographs and halftones Using Content Type How Original was Produced this setting the output will contain Photo and Text B Pree original medium quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is Slightly reduced hotocopied Me iginal p Orig Map Inkjet Original gt Photo EI Photograph e Text produces sharper edges and i
254. pliance 0 ccc cece 345 EH amp S Contact INIONMGUON EE 346 6 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Contents Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents Roses Fan BEER 10 LOTH S e a E E E E E E E EEEE EEEE ET OS 11 OUD UT COLO Een EE EE 11 Reduce a AE E A h R T R R A RR RRR RRR coho ones TR T oes 11 Nel OUDON 2 22 00 0000000000 0 0000000000 000000090 00020 00009 13 COD VYING skeen oo ee os teas ee nS ee a 13 CODY gd EE 14 0000000000 15 HOGG E 040 19 0 2222000000 re eer 19 Ties 00 2002222 220 3022000202 ee 20 Image Enhancement lt e e e e e nunn rsonr nerro or rrrroorrrrrrrorrrreno 20 COlOMPICSCIS EE 21 COMO e eli a EE 21 Layout AGJUSUMENE EE 22 lE ernt seac 0 22 lte tele EE 23 BOOK CODY ING EE 24 ele 6 e ee 0000000000 25 E
255. process could take few minutes information is sent F Maintenance Assistant Diagnostic information will be used by Xerox and Xerox On line Support tools to troubleshoot any problems with this machine Xerox On line Support tools can be accessed at WWW Xerox com ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 263 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Faults The Faults tab displays fault listings and as the device error logs Billing Information Supplies The faults are separated into Cu rrent Faults Messages la History Faults Current Messages and Fault History e Current Faults displays a list of current faults on the device Each fault can be selected for further information e Current Messages displays a list of all the current fault messages e Fault History provides a log of all the device errors Supplies The Supplies tab provides information on consumables such as the Solid Ink and SMart Kits ColorQube Ink This option displays the status of each of TC EE supplies Biling o the Solid Ink Sticks The percentage used and the estimated number of pages moe mg wee Bua remaining is shown 6 6 3 2 Estimated Pages S Remaining SE een Days 11 000 32 000 33 000 40 000 love 56 164 167 203 All Supplies This option displays the percentage used Machine raus supplies Billing Information information and the pages remaining for each of the consumables Magenta Ink M 24 11 000
256. quired Resets Use this option to reset the system Machine F ons a software e Software Reset on page 302 C Resets e Supply Counter Reset on page 303 e Troubleshooting Software Reset Software Reset is faster and wastes less consumables than switching the device off KE then on Software Reset is faster and wastes less consumables than switching the e When instructed by the device to perform a restart choose a software option and then select the Reset button e All Software resets the whole system software All Softwar Sisi When instructed by the machine to perform a restart choose a software option and then select the Reset button Copy Software e D v Network Software e Network Software resets the network controller software 302 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting e Copy Software resets the copier software Supply Counter Reset This option is used to reset the counter when a listed supply is replaced e Select the supply and then select Reset Counter e Select Reset to confirm Network The Network options are used to trouble shoot problems relating to the network connection Echo Test The Echo Test allows you to test the network connectivity e Select the appropriate protocol and select the Start Test button to run the echo test e TCP IP e AppleTalk e Novell or IPX Fax The Fax options are u
257. quired select Add to add the number to the recipient list 4 Select Close to return to the fax options Fax Directory The Fax Directory is used to store individual fax numbers which are used frequently The Fax Directory can be accessed from all screens where a fax number requires entering Up to 29 entries can be added Using the Fax Directory If numbers have been entered into the Fax Directory they can be accessed via the Fax Directory button 1 Select the Fax Directory button Fax Directory A list of fax numbers entered in the mg 5 7 Fax Directory is displayed Fax Number Recipients 2 Select the required number and select Add to Recipients from the drop 2 562 9865 down menu The number is added to the Recipients list Continue adding recipients as x required 3 To edit an entry select it in the list and select the Edit button Edit the entry as required and select Save 4 To clear an entry from the list select the entry requiring deletion and select Clear Entry from the drop down menu A confirmation screen is displayed select Clear Entry or Cancel 5 Select Close to return to the fax options The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the recipient list 82 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Server Fax Dialing Options Setting up the Fax Directory 1 Select the Server Fax tab and the Fax Directory button Assembly Lr Dialing Characters
258. r example you can enter your personal e mail address If you logged in through authentication and your details are available in the Address Book your e mail address is displayed e Using the keyboard enter the message required me by ie e Upto 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the TTL Ty back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text rT TTT CHE LC Baam e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Keyboards e Select Save to save your selections and exit 194 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing e requirements within a job To access the a Job Assembly options select Services Home and E mail Then select the Job Assembly tab Job Assembly D Build Job Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or a segment of pages a Ess a 2 You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text and 2 sl Renz EE completed job First split the originals into Geer with SE RES photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab and select the On button E Build Jo
259. r all trays e Select the setting required and select Save e Priority is used to indicate which tray is selected if trays contain the same media it also determines in which order the trays are displayed on the Copy tab Set the Tray Priority between 1 99 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest Select Save ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 275 Administration and Accounting Device Settings e Auto Selection enables the device to choose the best media for the job This setting also enables the device to automatically switch from one tray to another when a tray runs out of paper and another tray is available with the same media loaded Select Enable or Disable and select Save e Repeat the process for each of the trays as required Tray Contents Use to specify the size type and color of the media in a tray that has been designated as a dedicated tray Tray Full Paper Size Paper Type Paper Color Tray Size Setting x Paper Settings Select a tray designated asa Plain White Fully Adjustable dedicated tray 11x17 LJ Plain Buff Fully Adjustable 8 5x11 d Plain White Dedicated e Change Size is used to select the size E gt required for the tray Select the size of nm sear Uma white puyadusabie media loaded in the tray and select 2 0 Save ep 0 8511 _ Plain White Dedicated e Change Description is used to specify the paper type and color It is important this setting matches the paper type and color loaded in
260. r medium quality photos and graphics This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for photos and graphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 187 E mail Advanced Settings Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are e Normal Quality produces small files by using advanced compression E Quality File Size techniques Image quality is re acceptable but some quality Quay le Size Larger The Higher Quality option produces larger files with better image quality A Small files are better for sharing and transmitting over the network degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals 9 e Higher Quality produces larger files with better image quality Small File e Highest Quality produces the largest Size files with the maximum image qualit
261. r using the basic Workflow Scanning features are provided in the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How To Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features refer to Log In Out on page 176 Repositories Repositories are directories or filing locations set up on a server where your scanned files are saved to and held The Repositories are setup using Internet Services Before you can use Workflow Scanning your System Administrator must set up the repositories available to your device Selecting a template identifies the repository location your scanned job is filed to Repositories are validated by Internet Services when defined by the System Administrator as a scanning destination Up to 5 Repositories 1 default and 4 additional can be defined After the Repositories are set up they are available to you as choices when modifying templates 148 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Introduction Templates Templates are used for scanning and faxing jobs at your device via the Workflow Scanning service They define the parameters of your scan or fax job Information such as the final destination of your job the file location and the image quality settings are defined within the template along with the template name The template name is displayed within the template list accessed on the device touch screen You can select an existing template as is
262. rays It also provides information about the tray media and settings Information Pages Using this option individual guides can be ibe Print Sean M r Bonk Properties ren printed which provide information about amp Information Pages the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 services 55 and features It also provides sampler pages which are used for checking the quality and color settings Select the guide or sampler page required and select Print SMart eSolutions SMart eSolutions provides the ability to automatically send data to Xerox to be used for billing supplies tracking and replenishment and for troubleshooting problems SMart eSolutions provides the following ee Eo features e Meter Assistant automatically submits meter readings to Xerox from networked devices This ends the need to collect and report meter read information manually e Supplies Assistant manages ink and component supplies for your device and monitors actual usage e Maintenance Assistant monitors the device and reports diagnostic information to Xerox through your network You can also use the Maintenance Assistant to conduct an online troubleshooting session with Xerox and to download information about your device performance 224 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Status Meter Assistant Meter Assistant provides detailed information including dates times and counts of impress
263. rd to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button 5 Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanning option The Workflow Scanning features are displayed 6 Select the Scan To Home Templates Advanced Layout gt Fing Job CN Scanning Settings Adjustment Options Assembly option from the drop down menu e The Default Template is displayed DR Sean to Home Templates 1 Eeer and the current settings are changed altempiates to the settings in the Scan to Home template Scanning 1 Sided 7 Make programing changes to Output pp Wien Ki Tayout Filing Job Scanning Settings Adjustment Options Assembly Color 2 Sided Scanning Original Type and Scan Presets as required Additional Workflow Scanning options are provided on each of the tabs Refer to the following sections for further information e Advanced Settings on page 153 e Layout Adjustment on page 156 e Filing Options on page 159 e Job Assembly on page 162 8 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Scan to Home job Remove the originals from the document feeder or glass when scanning has completed The job enters the job list ready for filing to the home location specified 174 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Scan to Home Select Job Status to view all the job lists an
264. re to enable a user to send several fax jobs to the same destination in one transmission e Disabled switches off the function e Enabled activates the Batch Send option 292 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Mailbox amp Polling Policies Use this option to specify how long the system keeps documents received or stored in mailboxes before deleting Mailbox amp Polling Policies Delete On Print e Received Documents is used to specify the policy for documents ae received from remote machines RT e Delete On Print deletes the document after printing e Keep 1 72 Hours allows you to specify between 1 and 72 hours before deleting the document e Keep Forever keeps the document until manually deleted A confirmation screen is displayed as this can cause the memory to become full very quickly e Stored Documents is used to specify the policy for documents stored in the device for polling e Delete On Poll deletes the document after it has been polled e Keep 1 72 Hours allows you to specify between 1 and 72 hours before deleting the document e Keep Forever keeps the document until manually deleted A confirmation screen is displayed as this can cause the memory to become full very quickly Mailbox Setup Incoming Faxes can be stored in mailboxes prior to printing for convenience or added security Users can print the faxes in their eer et mailboxes at anytime This
265. recipients and the Subject are entered here eg Advanced Layout E mail Job Settings Adjustment Options Assembly E mail L Output Color Auto Detect New Recipient Use this option to enter details of all the recipients of the e mail To enter the recipient details 1 Select New Recipient Wa Recipient List 2 Select To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the entry box 3 Using the keyboard enter the e mail si m du a wl SLT e p to 40 alphanumeric ES characters can be entered IER Keyboards e To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 4 Select Add to add the e mail address DE DEE EEN 2 Settings Adjustment Options Assembly to the recipient list 5 Continue adding e mail addresses Recipient Book until all the recipient s have been added to the list j bloggs xerox com ah S cox j smith xerox com iss Case 2 2 r pat xerox com All the recipients are displayed in the D Output Color 2 Si 1 Original Type IS scan Presets Auto Detect Si Photo amp Text Custom recipient list ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 181 E mail E mail Options From To enter or edit the sender s name 1 Select From Note This option may have been e gerecht
266. red border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals e Contrast controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the More setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Less setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned image A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e 72 dpi recommended for output displayed on a computer It produces the smallest file size 200 dpi e 100 dpi recommended for output EZ L E nen that delivers low quality text T oe indi Rata chase 600 dpi documents EN Se EI e 150 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics 200 dpi e 200 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art o
267. report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions Select the Jobs tab This screen shows the jobs currently in the device list To access the list of Saved Jobs select the Saved Jobs tab Select the folder that contains the job you want to print Select the check box next to the job you want to print You may choose several jobs and specify how many copies you would like Select Print Job from the drop down menu and then select Go Your selected job or jobs are printed at the device using the saved print setting for each job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From Saving Jobs for use with Print From Saving Jobs for use with Print From Saved jobs stored on the device can be accessed and printed using the Print From service Saved Jobs are created using the Print Driver or Internet Services Job folders can be setup by the System Administrator using Internet Services and can be managed by the users Refer to Managing Saved Jobs on page 205 Jobs can be saved in the folders by selecting the Saved Job Job Type when submitting a print job from your PC or when submitting a print job using Internet Services Using the Print Driver Select or create a document on your PC 1 Select Print from the application s File menu The application Print window is displayed 2 Select the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 printer from the Printer Name drop down menu 3 Select Properties to access the print sett
268. riginal Type Resolution 1 Sided Photo Standard 200x100 dpi Server Fax Options e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos magazine pictures or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The i are e Standard 200x100 dpi is recommended for text documents It s Tm number and press Add 2 z requires less communication time but 9 TOL Characters does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos r a i Be e Fine 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases ak Goren Quality Adjustment ee ons EEST Assembly 2 Sided Scanning bel or me Type r solution 1 Sided me Standard 200x100 ieee a ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 85 Server Fax Image Quality Image Quality The Image Quality options provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output To access the Image Quality options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Image Quality tab Image Quality D image Options I image Enhancement Lighten
269. rint prints the job immediately without requiring a passcode e Secure Print is used for confidential or sensitive jobs The job is held at the device until a passcode is entered to Secure Print ee Passcode release the job for printing 5 4 10 Digits When you select this job type the Secure Print screen is af Confirm Passcode displayed for you to enter a unique passcode eses When the job arrives at the printer it is held in the job list Note This job will be held at the printer until you until you release the job using the same passcode SEI entered when the job was submitted Note If multiple secure jobs are held in the list and ok require the same secure code they will all be released for printing e Sample Set prints one copy of the job as a sample and holds the remaining copies in the job list at the printer Once you have checked the sample set you can release the remaining sets for printing or delete the job if no longer required 128 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Delay Print use this option to enter a specific time to print the job This is useful for large jobs or if you want all your jobs to print at the same time When you select this job type the Delay Print screen is displayed Enter the time required and submit the job The job remains in the job list until the specified time for printing Saved Job stores the job on the printer s hard drive so that it can then be printed on demand whe
270. rinted on different paper than the rest of your job Chapter Starts ensure a chapter begins on the right or left side of the page with a blank page inserted if needed Inserts are non imaged single or multiple pages that are placed into your copied sets Exceptions are pages that are imaged on different paper 3 Select the Chapter Starts button 4 Select the Page Number box and use Hefe the numeric keypad to enter a page janie pa number for the chapter start a 5 Select either On Right Page to print Start Chapter on Side 1 or On Left Page to print on Kaa o Side 2 6 Select the Add button to confirm your ID selections and add the programed ha Chapter Start to the list on the right Add further Chapter Starts as required 7 Select Close to return to the Special Pages screen A list of the selected Special Pages is displayed on the screen To make changes select the item in the list you wish to change and use Edit Use Delete or Delete All to delete unwanted entries Select Close Menu to exit from the drop down menu 8 Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 31 Copy Output Format Inserts Use the following instructions to program Inserts 1 On the Copy tab select the paper you Copy Image Quality Layout Adjustment Output Format Job Assembly want to use for the main body of the Output Color Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying Copy Output copies
271. rinted paper face down and with the top towards the front of the device in Tray A Bypass and Tray 5 Recycled Paper Use this option for any Recycled paper being loaded in the trays The device supports recycled media that has been designed for laser and solid ink devices such as Xerox Recycled paper 248 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Paper and Media Media Types Labels Labels consist of three layers the face sheet pressure sensitive adhesive and the backing or release sheet The device supports labels that have been designed for laser and solid ink devices such as Xerox Labels The adhesives are designed to withstand the higher temperatures of these devices without bleeding and causing spotting or damage to the internal components Note Dry gum labels those that require moistening before being applied can cause dry particles of glue to detach from the backing and should not be used The labels should be left in the printing environment overnight before using it in the printer to allow it to adjust to the ambient temperature e Load labels face up and with the top towards the front of the device in Trays 1 and 2 e Load labels face down and with the top towards the front of the device in Tray 4 Bypass Note Do not fan the label sheets before use unless the package instructs you to do so If jamming or multi sheet feeding occurs shuffle the labels before loading Heavyweight and Extra Heavyweight Use this p
272. rn S s jones xerox com Clear Text Administrator and may not be available 2 Ifadefault name is displayed select Clear Text to delete the entry 3 Using the keyboard enter the e mail address of the sender e Upto 40 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 4 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The e mail address entered is displayed in the From field Subject To enter a subject for the e mail 1 Select the Subject field 2 Using the keyboard enter the subject of the e mail e Upto 40 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text NN e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Keyboards 3 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The subject entered is displayed in the Subject field 182 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail E mail Options Address Book If the device has been setup to access the Network and Public Address Books you can use them to select recipients For information about setting up address books refer to the System Administrator Guide 1 Select the Address Book button A list of e mail addresses is displayed
273. rt Center It is used to download log information which can help to troubleshoot network related problems USB Settings This option is used to setup the USB port located at the rear of the device This port is used for software tools and for direct printing via a printer driver It cannot be used for direct printing via a USB Flash Drive the USB port located on the left side of the device supports this function 296 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Accounting Settings Accounting Settings The accounting settings are used to os Be E configure the accounting options Device Settings Se Accounting options are used to record 4 device usage by different groups or Service Settings Accounting Mode Billing Information departments and can also be used to See J Copy activity Report restrict access to different services emm Accounting Settings Detailed instructions for Accounting Gen Setups are provided in the System ee Troubleshootin Administrator Guide Accounting Mode Use this option to select the Accounting Mode required e None is used if no accounting mode is req uired x Accounting Mode e Auxiliary Access is used if a third party auxiliary device is installed on the device for accounting purposes For example card activated or coin activated devices can be installed Auxiliary EI Access erox Standard X Accountin
274. rts to be a certified copy thereof Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance but it is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your solicitor Other Countries Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty of making such reproductions Currency notes Bank notes and cheques Bank and government bonds and securities Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt contact your legal counsel 338 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations Fax Regulations United States Fax Send Header Requirements The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including a fax machine to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending th
275. s 310 Staple Cartridges 311 Customer Replaceable Units CRUs 264 CVT Glass 314 D Date amp Time Setting 272 Default Settings 270 Defining the Problem 315 Delay Send 67 90 Delete Mailbox Documents 68 Deleting Templates 163 Destination Services 165 Device Administration 270 Device Faults 264 Device Settings 271 Device Web Pages 221 Dialing Characters 52 60 86 Dialing Options 51 81 Directory 53 82 99 118 183 Display Brightness Setting 283 Document Feeder Problems 319 Document Management 161 Document Management Fields 166 Double Sided 58 84 100 131 151 Draft Copy 43 Duplexing 13 58 84 100 131 151 Duplicate Filenames 160 E Edge Erase 25 158 167 Edit Image Enhancement 167 Electrical Supply 330 E mail 180 E mail Service 180 Embedded Fax Settings 288 Embedded Web Pages 221 Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container 313 Emptying the Waste Ink Tray 312 Energy Program Compliance 345 Energy Save 308 Energy Saver Settings 271 ENERGY STAR 345 348 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Index Enlarge reduce 11 Entering a Fax Number 51 Server Fax 81 Entry Screen Default Setting 273 Equipment Safety 331 Erasing the Image 158 167 European Union 334 Exceptions 29 F Fault Logs 317 Fault Messages 317 Fault Statements 321 Faults 315 Faults Information 264 Fax Confirmation Report 65 Fax Dialing Options 51 Fax Directory 53 81 118 Fax Featur
276. s Custom Scan Area Mixed Size Originals The following are valid pairs of standard sizes which can be placed in the feeder and processed at the same time 8 5 11 kr A4 m D ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 7 Workflow Scanning Layout Adjustment Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original The options are e All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all the edges Use the SS Edge Erase arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted Individual Edges e Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount for each edge from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 Select Save to save your selections and exit 158 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Filing Options Filing Options Use the filing options to specify details ae Kee Scanni ettings Options Assembly about the scanned images to be stored for A LJ pile Name OFite Format D If File Already Exist example the file name the file format and C Es Es H one el Only the overwrite conditions To access the B Filing Options select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the F
277. s if printing Side 2 on pre printed paper Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Light lines and streaks appear on prints or Reprint the job copies Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Background appears on copies Reprint the job e Make sure the document feeder is fully closed when using the document glass Enable Auto Suppression for the Background Suppression feature in the Image Quality options The image has shifted or is split incompleteor e Reprint the job scrambled Steps in horizontal or vertical lines e Reprint the job e Fix the image quality problems using the Light Lines Quick option Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Print color is not what was expected Reprint the job Use a higher quality print mode Select a different color correction from the print driver Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Try using different colors in the document 322 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Potential Solution Copy color is not what was expected e Reprint the job e Usea higher quality print mode e Select a different Original Type e Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Small white specks or
278. s recommended for text and line art vee cic nr ovina e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos magazine pictures or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Map is used if your original is a map or contains intricate line art and text e Newspaper Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text How the Original was Produced e Printed Original is for originals that have come from a magazine book or newspaper or that have been printed on a large printing device e Photocopied Original is for originals that are photocopies e Photograph is for high quality photographic originals e Inkjet Original is for originals that have been produced using an inkjet printer e Solid Ink Original is for originals produced by a solid ink printing process such as output from this device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 19 Copy Image Quality Image Options Image Options is used to change the appearance of the copy output The options are Image Options Lighten Darken e Lighten Darken provides manual SH Sp control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Move the indicator down to darken Kier the image or up to lighten the image e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images Move the indicator up
279. s select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the Layout Adjustment tab original Orientation O original Size O Edge Erase Upright Images Auto Detect All Edges 0 20 Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The options are e Upright Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the document feeder Use this option if Oe and Sideways Yougea refer te e the direction the images are loaded in the your images are in the orientation Upright images Document Feeder Portrait and Landscape Originals refer to the match i ng the image shown when P images on the original documents With these Sideways Images selections you can load the originals either upright loaded in the document feeder k Original Orientation or sideways and the device will rotate it appropriately oe Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over e Sideways Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the ii document feeder Use this option if your images are in the orientation matching the image shown when loaded in the document feeder e Portrait Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Portrait image orientation Originals can be fed in any orientation e Landscape Originals refers to the image orientation on the original
280. s a standard feature that can be enabled If enabled it is selected by pressing the Services Home button then the Workflow Scanning option Workflow Scanning enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document Use Workflow Scanning when both your device Internet Fax pe and your computer have access to the same specified filing location The scanned file is placed in location specified by the template selected on the device for example a repository setup on a network server a PC drive or a USB Flash Drive The standard Workflow Scanning option enables the electronic images to be stored and retrieved from a server or workstation on the network Further options are available e Scan to Mailbox will store the image in the device memory and the user can retrieve the files using Internet Services For further information refer to Scan to Mailbox on page 169 e Scan to Home allows the user to send the files to a location on the network specified as their Home destination For further information refer to Scan to Home on page 173 e Scan to USB Flash Drive allows the user to store the images on a USB flash drive inserted into the device USB port refer to USB Port on page 209 Workflow Scanning is setup by a System Administrator using Internet Services Users can use Internet Services to create templates and folders once the relevant scanning function has been setup and enabled Instructions fo
281. s and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents NOVICES CNG Safety EE 328 Safety Labels and Symbols 329 Operational Safety Information 330 Se gt eet ie e eere TES 330 Maintenance Information 332 Consumables Information 332 Product Safety Certification 333 Ba C RCO OUO 202 0020202 000000 00000020 0300 0202 334 United States FCC Regulations 334 Canada Regulations 202 2020220 000 0200000 000 0000 res enoi 334 Sites ele Ee e WEE 334 Turkey ROHS Regulation lt 335 Copy REO UNIONS ee ER 336 Bi Te Ken a i a eee ie eee are ee ee ye ee 336 CONO eege EE Ee 338 OUI GIGS Ee 338 FAX Viet Le 339 Rene TTT 339 CONA dee ERR 340 00 22002200 202 0200000 00 E 341 SOUNA O 0000000004 0002 9 3120000020 0000200009 341 Material Safety Data 42 22 22 342 Product Recycling and Disposal 0 ccc ccc cence enn e ene e eee nees 343 Ol CONG WEE 343 European Union EEN 343 Energy Program Compliance 345 Alt Markets ec 345 EH amp S Contact e ge e e e EEN 346 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 327 Safety and Regulations Notices and Safety Notices and Safety Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the equipment Refer to them as
282. s default Prints double sided to save paper e Turn off Banner Pages by default Turns off banner pages to reduce the amount of paper and ink used e Set 2 Up as my default layout Prints two pages of content on each sheet to reduce the amount of paper and ink used e Set Sample Set as my default Job Type Use this option to print one copy of each job to check prior to printing all the sets required e Set Draft Mode as my Print Quality Reduces the print quality to save ink e Hide Earth Smart settings button Enables you to remove the Earth Smart button from the printer driver screen ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 12 7 Print Paper Output Paper Output Use the Paper Output tab to select the basic printing requirements for your job Identify the type of job being submitted the paper sides printed finishing and Paper Output Special Pages Color Options Layout Watermark Advanced _ 2 Sided Printing lt Job Type Je quality requirements S Gim lt O Paper Finishing Note Some features are only CEET fi 1 Whit No Hol supported by specific printer Printer Default Type No Folding configurations operating systems or Print Quality driver types You may see more eege features or options listed than your incase EE specific device supports ise Saved Settings ive Deeds Job Type Use this option to select the type of job being submitted to the printer e Normal P
283. s the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen 6 Using Program Next Segment select the options required for the second segment 7 Load the second segment originals and press Start ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 73 Fax Job Assembly 8 Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programed and scanned 9 After the last segment has been scanned select Submit the Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed 74 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Secure Faxes Secure Faxes All incoming faxes are submitted to the Incomplete Jobs list as fax jobs and usually print immediately If the administrator has switched on the Secure Receive feature all incoming faxes require a passcode in order to release them for printing 1 To release a Secure Fax for printing press the Job Status button and select the held fax in the list 2 To release a fax for printing select the Release button from the drop down menu 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode and select the Release Job button The secure fax job is released for printing Active Jobs Completed Jobs Owner Name Cvillone JobStatus doc 3 Printing TVu it Delete gt Release 2 job Progress 5 Job Details Close Menu B E MachineStatus doc Active Jobs Completed Jobs P Release Job JobStatus doc Job Owner BTVu Enter your Secure Passcode to print pres
284. s to be faxed to a remote fax destination If this is selected the fax destination must also be entered File This option is used to select the filing location required for your scanned images A default filing destination is always available If additional locations have been defined by the System Administrator these can also be added to the template 1 To add a new destination select Add inn The Filing Destination options are a displayed 2 Select the Filing Policy required for the destination if a file exists with the same name e Add Number to Name e Add Date amp Time to Name e Overwrite Existing File e Do Not Save ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 165 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates 3 Select the File Destination required using the drop down menu 4 If required enter a file path for storing your scanned images 5 Select Apply to add the new destination and exit the screen The destination is listed Document Management Fields This option enables users to assign descriptive data to a scanned job The e descriptive data can be accessed by other l software applications to assist in e searching indexing and the automated processing of scanned documents 1 To add a field select Add and enter the data required Distribution mmer cs Add Document Managemeni Fale 2 Select Editable if the user is required to enter data at the time of scanning Select Not Editable to include fixed data 3 E
285. s using the numeric keypad or Address Book until the number is complete Select Save to save your number in the list and return to the Address Book screen 5 Select Close to return to the fax options The number displays in the Recipients list Setting up the Address Book Individuals 1 Select the Fax tab and the Address Book button a Fax Address Book 2 Select the Individuals button from 6996 Je SE the drop down menu 3 Select an empty slot from the list of Ge Ge entries If necessary use the Up and seo ed 4 Enter the name of the recipient in the Entry Name field lt lt S 00 Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect entry or the Clear Text button to delete the entire entry Select Save 54 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax 8 9 Enter the fax number of the recipient in the Fax Number field Use the Dialing Characters button to enter the number if special characters are required Refer to Dialing Characters on page 52 Select a Starting Rate for the recipient Use the drop down menu to select a speed for the option selected Refer to Starting Rate on page 66 Select Cover Sheet and select On to E Entry 005 Details Entry Name Starting Rate Super G3 o EI Forced ga Dialing Characters Super G3 Speed I 33 6 Kbps Dialing Options include a cover sheet for the recipient Complete the details required refer to Cover Sheet on page 56 for
286. se care when moving or relocating equipment Please contact your local Xerox dealer to arrange relocation of the equipment to a location outside of your building e Always locate the equipment on a solid support surface not on plush carpet that has adequate strength to support the weight of the machine e Always locate the equipment in an area that has adequate ventilation and room for servicing e Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning Note Your Xerox equipment is equipped with an energy saving function to conserve power when the equipment is not in use The equipment may be left on continuously Equipment Safety Do Not Do These A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Never use a ground adapter plug to connect the equipment to a power outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal e Never attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation e Never obstruct ventilation openings They are provided to prevent overheating e Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers e Never locate the machine near a radiator or any other heat source e Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings e Never override or cheat any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices e Never plac
287. sed to test the Fax functionality on the device Fax Protocol Report The Fax Protocol Report provides information about the Fax function on the device e Select Protocol Report and then the Print Now button to print the report x Supply Counter Reset Pages Remaining Supply Document Feeder Feed Roller 50 768 Pages Estimated Pages Remaining Reset Counter This feature should be used when a listed supply is replaced Reset Counter will reset the selected supply to 100 Remaining Faults Machine Information Troubleshooting s Billing Supplies Information Network Features m Supplies Machine Information Device Settings Service Settings Network Settings Billing Faults Information Fax Features CH Fax Protocol Report Accounting Settings Security Settings L Troubleshooting ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 3 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting 304 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the
288. sert Options to be placed Before Page 1 or select After Page s to place inserts Insert Quantity A after the specified page numbers S Page s 2579 Note To add an insert to the front of your document use the Before 0 c separated by commas Page 1 option For example 1 3 5 12 3 Select the number of insert sheets required Blue 4 Specify the page number before each insert If multiple inserts are required it is recommended you enter all the page numbers separated 7 sob settings by a comma or enter a page range separated by a dash 5 Select the Paper requirements for the inserts and select OK If Pre Cut Tab is selected as the paper type enter the number of tabs in the sequence in the Pre Cut Tab window displayed Note If using tab stock for your blank or pre printed inserts refer to the Paper and Media guide for information about loading tabs All the inserts programed display in the table 6 If any inserts have individual programing such as a different paper color or a different number of inserts select the entry required and use the Edit button to change the programing Add Exceptions Use this option to specify the characteristics of any pages in the print job that differ from the settings used for the majority of the job For example your print job may contain 30 pages that print on standard sized paper and two pages that print on a different size of paper Use this option to indicate
289. shed rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents ak ge BEE 50 e EE 51 Vleit e NEE 51 SEI RR e Un e HEEN 51 Dialing Characters 52 005 BOOK EE 53 COVE SNEED EE 56 Sek eee ee Se ee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee Te eT er errr 58 Z SIGS en c sl 4 501255 yoo EE ee 58 Biever WEI e EEN 58 e serene cae eee ee eee eee ne eee eee 59 OJS EE 60 ING GeO 22223 2 200 a a sage E E 60 Image ENNANCEMIENE EE 60 22 2020020 0000000000 000000 eT 2 0100000 2 OUL 3 BOOK POXING 40000 0000000000 0000000020 eRe RAE 3 EA 65 Coniinmation REDO EE 65 nO ROL EEN 66 BENA D ME 67 Send Meader Text EE 67 denies EE 68 Eeee gt 00 00 000000000 70 Remote PONO EE 71 JODA nna EE 73 DUNC IO EE 73 KT 0 NEE 5 BOG AAT EE 76 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 49 Fax Introduction Introduction Fax is an optional feature that can be installed on your device If installed it can be accessed by select
290. shown when loaded in the document feeder e Portrait Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Portrait image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction e Landscape Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Landscape image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 189 E mail Layout Adjustment Original Size Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Area is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other combinations are shown on the screen Select Save to save your select
291. sity and down the scale for less density for each of the three options ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 21 Copy Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment Using the Layout Adjustment features you can change the appearance of your output image This includes shifting the image aes eee Le producing a mirror image deleting an area e from any or all of the edges of the original and copying from book originals O mage Shift Edge Erase UO invert Image off Individual Edges No Mirror Image Side 1 Individual Edges Positive Image j Side 2 Individual Edges p Fa Copy Image Quality Sg Output Format job Assembly O Original Orientation O Original Size Book Copying Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The options are e Upright Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the B document feeder Use this option if upright mages and Sideways Images refer to e e direction the images are loaded in the your images are in the orientation Upright images matching the image shown when SE Sideways Images selections you can load the originals either upright or sideways and the device will rotate it appropriately loaded in the document feeder oe Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over e Sideways Images refers to the direction the images are
292. stomer documentation e Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the user documentation e Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service Consumables Information e Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container e Keep all consumables away from the reach of children e Cartridges When handing cartridges avoid skin or eye contact Eye contact can cause irritation and inflammation Do not attempt to disassemble the cartridge This can increase the risk of skin or eye contact 332 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Product Safety Certification This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed Agency Standard Canadian Standards Association UL60950 CSA 22 2 No 60950 Canadian Standards Association IEC60950 EN60950 This product has been manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 333 Safety and Regulations Basic Regulations Basic Regulations Xerox has tested this product to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards These standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this product in a typical office environment United States FCC Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
293. stomer Support information Machine e Billing Information pp information and the Machine Serial Number is displayed on this screen 0 e Paper Tray ustomer Su P y nain airn Information Device Model Pages ColorQube 9303 Machine Serial Number Installed BRE123456N iy Options System Software Version and Maintenance 061 180 100 18590 Assistant Service Code 3 Maintenance Assistant If a problem occurs which requires further investigation from Xerox diagnostic information can be sent directly to Xerox using the Maintenance Assistant option e Access the Maintenance Assistant option by selecting the Machine Status button The Maintenance Assistant button is located on the Machine Information tab e Select the Maintenance Assistant button The option to send diagnostic information to Xerox is provided e Select the option and following the screen messages to send the information to Xerox This information will assist Xerox in identifying the problem 324 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Safety and Regulations 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United State
294. t Fax Image Quality Adjustment Options Assembly Dialing Characters Address d Book Q Cover Sheet E Original Type Text 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to E Ton S R Image Quality Adjustment Options Assembly set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original S Enter id Le ialin document are scanned The options are Weegee Characters e 1 Sided is used if your original e documents are single sided ii Book e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option O Cover Sheet Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for Originals containing high quality photographs and halftones Using this setting the scanned image will contain medium quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced A Layout Fax Job Image Quality Adjustment Options Assembly Text 58 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Fax Fax e Photo is used specifically for ori
295. t Image 26 J Job Deletion Setting 299 Job List 257 Job Log 168 Job Sheets Setup 295 Job Status 257 Job Submission using Internet Services 228 Jobs 227 Active Jobs 227 Saved Jobs 227 JPEG 159 L LAN Fax 114 115 Language Keyboard Layout Setting 272 Lighten Darken 20 60 86 101 153 186 Lighten Darken 60 101 153 List of Jobs 257 Loading Paper 238 Local Polling 70 Local Templates 150 Log In Out 6 Logs 317 M Machine Administration 270 Machine Defaults 270 Machine Faults 264 Machine Settings 271 Machine Status 262 Machine Web Pages 221 Mailbox Polling 70 Mailbox Setup 293 Mailboxes 68 Mailboxes for Scanning 169 Maintenance 310 312 Maintenance Assistant 224 Maintenance Safety Information 332 Managing Saved Jobs 205 Manual Dialing 51 81 Material Safety Data 342 Measurements Setting 273 Media 238 Messages 317 Meter Assistant 224 Meter Reading 224 265 Mixed Size Originals 63 Modify or Delete Folder 205 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 349 Index Modifying Templates 163 Multi Page TIFF 106 159 Multipoll Report Activity Report 294 N Naming the File 159 Network Accounting 299 Network Echo Test 303 Network Scanning 148 Network Templates 150 New Recipient 97 New Templates 163 Non Secure Polling 70 Notices and Safety 328 Number of Prints 224 O On Demand Image Overwrite Setting 299 Operational Safety Information 330 Options
296. t Options Assembly the features which enhance the image quality or output quality To access the Lien an Advanced Settings select Services Home wi Auto Contrast and Workflow Scanning Then select the Advanced Settings tab O pinya O update Templates Quality Normal Last Updated File Size Small August 25 2005 07 24 PM Image Options Image Options is used to change the appearance of the output image The EE 9 LI 95 LU options are Lighten Darken e Lighten Darken provides manual SCH k FES control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Move the indicator down to darken Qe Ge Ge the image or up to lighten the image e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images Move the indicator up to sharpen the image Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Darken Pastel e Saturation controls the balance between vivid and pastel shades of the image Move the indicator towards Vivid for more saturated colors Move the indicator towards Pastel for less saturated colors Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by P image Enhancement 9 5 oe reducing the background or adjusting the contrast The options are L e Background Suppression enhances EI T vr originals that have colored Di F Auto Suppression Auto Contrast Per backgrounds by reducing or Qe eliminating the b
297. t lines fix when Print Test Pages Light Lines Quick iai 5 9 the confirmation screen is displayed Fix Options Oe immediately e Light Lines Quick corrects Light i Ink Smears 6 Mins use multiple sheets of paper to Lines when detected until a Full Fix is EI enews clean printed ink smears completed y e Advanced e Light Lines Full performs a maintenance routine when the machine is idle to fix the light line problem e Ink Smears is selected to correct any ink smear quality issues Problem Statements If you are experiencing difficulties using your device check the suggestions below for problem solving advice Problem Potential Solution Dark or colored lines and streaks appear onthe e Reprint the job output when copying or scanning from the e Make sure the defect is not on the original document glass Clean the document glass and the Constant Velocity Transport CVT glass Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Dark or colored lines and streaks appear on the Reprint the job output when copying or scanning form the Make sure the defect is not on the original document feeder Clean the document glass and the Constant Velocity Transport CVT glass Fix the image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 for instructions Blurry prints are being produced Reprint the job Fix the image quality pr
298. t list Continue adding e mail addresses as required Use the Search option to search for a specific entry Select Search and enter the name required using the keyboard and select Search The matching entries are displayed Select the name required and add the recipient to the list using the drop down menu To search different address books use the Public Address Book or Network Address Book option if available Address Book Search Public Address Book Recipients 0 SEN Close gem E Keyboards SS Bonon COCO IU E mmm Select the Address Book required using the drop down menu to the left of the field and search using the same method described To find out more information about an address in the Address Book select Details Full details of the e mail address owner are displayed Select Close to exit the Details window Output Color The Output Color options include selections to automatically detect and match the color of your original or produce monotone full color or grayscale output from your original The options are Auto Detect to select output that matches your original Black amp White to select monotone output regardless of the color of your original Grayscale to use gray scales instead of color Color to select color output from your original Advanced Internet Fax Settings BSA nee Recipient 9 Aut
299. t ne P Ee ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 75 Fax Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service 1 To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 76 ColorQube 9301
300. t the Edit Details button Edit the entry as Browse Deg required and select Save I Fax Address Book Speed Dial Name Fax Number Recipients 5 To clear an entry from the Address Book list select the entry requiring 001 John Doe 569 1111 deletion and select Clear Entry from the drop down menu A confirmation ES Sere hash ees BS Kdi Details screen is displayed select Clear Entry 6 Select Close to return to the fax options screen The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipients list ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 53 Fax Dialing Options Using Chain Dial The Chain dialing feature allows you to create a single fax recipient by adding 2 or EE more fax numbers together For example B aer SE an area code may be stored separately to the telephone number Chain dialing Speed Dial Name Fax Number Recipients combines these 2 entries into a single fax GY 03 number 1 Select Address Book and then the Chain Dial button 2 If numbers or special dialing characters are required before the Gb Sma eee Address Book number use the numeric keypad to enter the numbers and characters required goo e 3 Select the Address Book entry Sa wa 001 John Doe 569 1111 required and select Add to Recipient ees Coo R a The recipients fax number is added to the number in the Recipient entry box 004 Somebody 11 Continue adding number
301. t the ratio window to 100 if you More Plain 2 2 Sided Landscape want your output image to be the Reduce Enlarge SH Le Kc e Alternatively select the ratio button and use the numeric keypad to type in the ratio required same size as your original More Rotate Side 2 More Proportional Selections made on this screen will reduce or enlarge the image by the same ratio in both directions so that the image gets d Seen bigger or smaller but the proportions Proportional 100 Sx 14 85 x11 remain the same e Independent X DER 17 4 11 A4 A3 1 B5 B4 and use the numeric keypad or the e arrow buttons to enter the ratio EE req ul red geg x11 180 8 5 x11 Sr e Select the Variable button ee 6 A5 SE B4 e Use the Preset buttons to select L Boe 400 100 Auto or commonly used ratios which can be set up by your Administrator The selected proportional ratios in percentages are shown next to the button together with an example application When Auto is selected the device chooses the best ratio to reduce or enlarge the original onto the selected paper size You must specify a paper tray before using this option Independent X Y This selection enables you to set different reduction or enlargement ratios for the fla Reduce Enlarge 9 ee width and the Y height of the image WSS Presets X Y This will produce a distorted copy of your H J ae yp 1
302. t the top of the page to send the job to the device over the internet The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving and printing depending on the selection ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From Saving Jobs for use with Print From Managing Saved Jobs Create New Folder Folders and the files saved within them can be managed using Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is D 192 168 100 100 enter the following eree omma XEROX ColorQube 9303 into the URL field EE http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a configuration report Refer to the Machine and Job Status guide for instructions 4 Select the Jobs option g TT a 5 Select the Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options 6 Select Create New Folder 7 Input the name for the folder in the Name field As a normal user you are only able to create Public folders These are the other kind of folders you may see e The Public folder has been created by a user It can be used by any user and has no access authority limitations Any user can access and modify the documents in this folder e The Read Only folder is created by the System Administrator or a user as
303. t you wish to change and use Edit Use Delete or Delete All to delete unwanted entries Select Close Menu to exit from the drop down menu Select Save to confirm your selections and run the job Annotations The Annotations feature enables you to automatically add a comment page number date or Bates Stamp to your copy output You can select any or all of these annotation options and specify where on the copy output they should appear You can also select the appearance of the annotations such as the font size and font color The options are Confidential 0 Page Numbers to automatically print a page number in a specified position on the page Page numbers are automatically increased by one For 2 sided copy output the page number is printed on both sides and counts as two pages Comment to add up to 50 alpha numeric characters in a specified position on the page An existing comment can be added or a new comment can be created or edited Date to add today s date in a specified format and position on the page The date printed is the date set on your device Bates Stamp to add a selected Bates Stamp in a specified position on the page Bates Stamping is used primarily in the legal and business fields and consists of a set prefix such as a case number or client reference together with a page number applied to a document as it is being processed The prefix can contain up to 8 alpha numeric characters You can add a new pre
304. tall the emptied hole punch waste container ensuring that the container is inserted correctly Print Quality Maintenance There are a number of tasks your device performs automatically to ensure it is running at optimum print quality Automatic Print Quality Maintenance Your device contains a sub system that periodically monitors the quality of the image being put on the drum This system is known as the Ink On Drum IOD system This system will automatically detect and correct a number of parameters in order to maintain optimum print quality This maintenance routine is automatic and lasts for approximately 60 seconds The device schedules this maintenance during non use time which is determined by the Intelligent Ready feature Cleaning Pages If a problem occurs and ink residue remains in the system the device will run blank sheets through the paper path to clean the system This procedure does not require any user intervention but may take a few minutes to perform The cleaning pages will be directed to the top tray and should be discarded There are additional troubleshooting tasks which can be performed to fix image quality problems Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 320 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 313 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Cleaning Tasks AY WARNING When cleaning the device do NOT use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners Do NOT pour fluids directly onto any area Use s
305. techniques Image quality is Quality Norma c i File Size Sma acce ptable but some q uality SE The Normal Quality option produces smaller files with degradation and character Se renee Sea R Small files are better for sharing and transmitting over the substitution errors may occur with network some originals e Higher Quality produces larger files with better image quality e Highest Quality produces the largest files with the maximum image quality Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network Select Save to save your selections and exit ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 103 Internet Fax Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you Tana to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style of your faxed document To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Internet Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab O Original Orientation O Original Size Upright Images Auto Detect Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The options are e Upright Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the E Original Orientation document feeder Use this option if upright mages and Sideways Images refer to e e direction the images are loaded in the your images are in the orientation Upright images matching
306. ted automatically by the device and are displayed in the fault logs Once the conditions which resulted in the fault display being generated have been resolved the display is removed 316 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Fault Logs Fault information can be accessed using the Machine Status button Machine Status provides information about the device the status of the paper trays consumables and any current faults Usage counters are also available The Faults tab displays fault listings and Machine the device error logs Billing Faults Supplies infarction The fau Its are separated into Cu rre nt e Current Faults Current Messages m Fault History Faults Current Messages and Fault History Current Faults This option displays a list of any current faults on the device Each fault can be ee selected for further information and 0 instructions Current Messages This option displays a list of all the current fault messages associated with the current device status and faults ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 317 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Fault History The Fault History is a log of the last 20 faults occurring on the device The fault code associated with each fault and the date and time a fault occurred is displayed It also displays the device image count at the time each fault occurred and any relevant paper or
307. ter details of all the recipients of the Internet Fax To enter the recipient details 1 Select New Recipient ES Recipient List 2 Select To or Cc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the GC sg Co and select Add entry box 3 Using the keyboard enter the e mail mm SESS address cess Soleil TT PTT TTT TT CITI Todeeteachoracterusethe Test T e nn back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards e Upto 40 alphanumeric characters can be entered 4 Se lect Add to add th e e mMm ai add ress Internet Advanced Layout Internet Fax Job Fax Settings Adjustment Options Assembly to the recipient list 5 Continue adding e mail addresses Se Book until all the recipient s have been To j bloggs xerox com added to the list eee ene a Cc r pat xerox com sd All the recipients are displayed in the v Output Color Si i Original Type Black amp White Si Photo amp Text recipient list ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 97 Internet Fax Internet Fax From To enter or edit the sender s name 1 Select From Note This option may not be available Ee Beer Clear Text 2 Ifa default name is displayed select Clear Text to delete the entry 3 Using the keyboard enter the e mail 4 address of the sender STT U e Up to 40 alphanumeric
308. that represents the required number of images per page e Alternatively select the Specify Rows amp Columns button and use the arrow buttons to select the number of rows and columns from 1 to 15 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy HH Page Layout Pages per se side Repeat Image Paper Supply Auto Select 17 2 11 L g 358 511 Transparency L ore 2 Pages 4 Pages 9 Pages Naa L Rows amp DI 6 Pages 2 Times 4 Times 6 Times 9 Times Specify Rows amp Columns Auto Repeat Layout Adjustment Output Format Job Assembly 2 Sided Copying 1 1 Sided Copy Output w Collated 1 2 Sided ar N 1 Staple 2 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 More Portrait Originals CES CES S Original a Orientation Portrait Originals o Columns 1 15 Li Portrait Originals A 4 Landscape ka rece gt s Orientation Portrait Originals Output Format e Select either Portrait Originals or Landscape Originals from the drop down menu on the right e If Auto Repeat is selected the size of the original is used to EH Page Layout automatically calculate the maximum number of rows and E op columns that can be accommodated on the currently selected paper size Pages per EN side Repeat Image e To determine how the images are printed select either Upright GE Images or Sideways images ae ER from the drop d
309. the amount to be erased from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges on both the first and second sides Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount for each edge from 0 to Edge Erase 50 mm 0 to 2 0 Mirror Side 1 can be selected to erase Ki All Edges exactly the same amount on the Side 2 image as selected for Side 1 None Selected Presets provide access to commonly Side 1 used erase settings and are customized by the System Administrator using Tools None Selected Header Footer Erase ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 25 Copy Layout Adjustment Invert Image Invert Image allows you to reverse the image or create a negative This feature is useful for originals that have a substantial Negative Image amount of dark background or light text E DEER and images saving on ink usage a The options are e Mirror Image reverses the original image creating a mirror of the original e Negative Image converts the dark image areas to light and the light 0 Invert image e JI o LI zs image areas to dark ver Image Negative image Normal Image e Positive Image Ze vy EN Mirror Image Negative Image 9 26 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy Output Format Output Format The Output options allow you to manipulate the copied images and enhanc
310. the time using a 12 hour clock you must also select either the AM or PM button e Select Save to save your selections and exit The fax will be stored in memory and sent at the specified time Send Header Text This feature allows you to include header text information when sending the fax The information is printed in the header at the top of each page of the fax transmission The information included is displayed on the screen and can be customized using Tools Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide e Select On to enable the Send Header Text to print on the fax output E Send Header Text Select Save to save your selections and EI oft exit On aa ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 67 Fax Fax Options Mailboxes Mailboxes are areas of device memory where incoming faxes are stored or from which outgoing faxes can be polled Mailboxes enable you to store all received MML 2 fax documents until it is convenient to retrieve them Conversely storing fax documents in a mailbox for Polling allows a remote user or users to retrieve the fax on demand IC a Mailboxes 2 Sided Scanning Original Type Lighten Darken Suppression Original Size Book Faxing vall 4o Remote o vii 0 Local E edie toca aiio Delete Local Mailbox Documents Mailboxes must be set up by the System Administrator before fax documents can be stored in them The device can contain up to 200 electronic ma
311. the watermark Select Color or Black and White to display the watermark in the selected font color or gray respectively Use the Edit option to change an existing watermark To delete the selected watermark select Delete from the drop down menu Note Not all applications support watermark printing 142 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Advanced The Advanced tab enables you to select advanced printing options that are rarely changed Note Some features are only supported by specific printer configurations operating systems or driver types You may see more features or options listed than your specific device supports Advanced Paper Output Special Pages Color Options Layout Watermark Advanced E Advanced Settings iy Document Options E Lag Paper Output a Lal Image Options E Booklet Layout Advanced Printing Features e Y TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font TrueType Font Download Option Automatic PostScript Output Option Optimize for Speed PostScript Language Level 3 Send PostScript Error Handler Yes Saved Settings ie Deke ColorQube 3 143 Print Advanced 144 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permissio
312. the device Select the appropriate Paper Type and Color setting and select Save Plain White Fully Adjustable e Repeat the process for each of the trays as required Timers Select the Timers option to access the Em Leg Biting following settings Device e Auto Resume Timer on page 277 dier Service Settings Features e Held Job Timeout on page 277 Network Settings Auto Resume Timer System Timeout on page 27 iann Held Job Timeout Accounting Settings Settings n Security Settings Troubleshooting 276 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Auto Resume Timer If the device is stopped during a job this feature determines if the device automatically resumes the job after a set OPEET A EEE SE ET EE A rename ogee operations at the time designated Auto Resume Timeout Secs Select Wait for User to have the system remain stopped e E Wait for User Pad Auto Resume Timer period of time or whether it waits for user intervention to resume the job This can prevent a user leaving the device ina stopped or paused state until a user selects resume or cancel e Auto Resume is selected to automatically resume stopped operations at the time designated Select the period of time the device waits before resuming using the arrow buttons between 15 and 120 seconds e Wait for User instructs the system to r
313. the image shown when SE Sideways Images selections you can load the originals either upright or sideways and the device will rotate it appropriately loaded in the document feeder oe Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over e Sideways Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the ii document feeder Use this option if your images are in the orientation matching the image shown when loaded in the document feeder e Portrait Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Portrait image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction e Landscape Originals refers to the image orientation on the original documents Use this option to select a Landscape image orientation Originals can be fed in any direction Select Save to save your selections and exit 104 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Original Size Layout Adjustment Select Original Size to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection or Mixed Size Originals if scanning a mix of sizes The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standar
314. the menu e Multi Page TIFF Tagged Image File Format produces a single TIFF file containing several pages of scanned images A more specialized software is required to open this type of file format e TIFF 1 File per Page produces a graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned e JPEG 1 File per Page Joint Photographic Experts Group produces a compressed graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned Select Save to save your selections and exit Message This option is used to enter a message for the e mail The message is the text contained within the e mail and not the e mail subject line e Using the keyboard enter the message required E Fite Name e Upto 50 alphanumeric i Enter an attachment file name and select Save characters can be entered e To delete a character use the FEE EEE LE ELE LEE Ee back arrow key or to clear the entire entry select Clear Text eI I TL M e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language 1 Jee O T keyboards Ggs ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 193 E mail E mail Options e Select Save to save your selections and exit Reply To The Reply To feature enables you to include an e mail address you want the recipient to reply to Fo
315. the number of pages in the set Folding If the optional Tri fold Module is installed on your device A4 or 8 5x11 media in a weight range of 60 to 105 gsm 16 to 28 lb can be folded in a Single Fold C Fold or Z Fold Originals must always be loaded Short Edge Feed SEF and you can select the orientation of your originals whether the images are Upright on the page or sideways ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 15 Copy Copy Options e Single Fold the page will be folded in half and you can select the raons JL e following options Acte E show edge er RT RER e Individually is used to fold each E 2 page individually spas ra 8 gier s set e Together as a Set is used to fold EI Cre VEE M all the pages together to create 0 single booklet e Booklet Staple is selected to fold ee GEN and staple the output This is Gate only available with the Together as a Set option e Advanced Settings are used to select additional layout options e Originals options allow you to select if your originals are standard or already formatted as a booklet e Side 1 Image options are used to select if the image on the first side is printed inside or outside the fold e Collation is used to select collated or uncollated output e Cold I _the page will be folded as shown Select whether to have the image printed on the inside or outside of the fold and Collated for sets or Uncollated for stacks e ZFold the page wil
316. the output image The Image Options options are Lighten Darken Lighten Sharpen e Lighten Darken provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Move the indicator down to darken K Z K the image or up to lighten the image e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images Move the indicator up to sharpen the image Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Darken T Pastel e Saturation controls the balance between vivid and pastel shades of the image Move the indicator towards Vivid for more saturated colors Move the indicator towards Pastel for less saturated colors Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by P image Enhancement 9 reducing the background or adjusting the 99 ontras SE contrast The options are Chal L e Background Suppression enhances n EE originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or KEE v eliminating the background on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper 186 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail Advanced Settings e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colo
317. the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are To overcome this use the Custom Scan Area feature in Original Size to enter the exact size of the page Refer to Original Size on page 23 e Both Pages use to scan both pages the left page of the book will be BA Book copying scanned first Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50 X HEE AK mm 0 to 2 to be deleted fromthe M Y center of the book in order to delete EN Se gt a 1 unwanted marks reproduced from the E Right to Left gutter of the book e E o A e Left Page use to scan the left page EI Right Page Only only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the right side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book e Right Page use to scan the right page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the left side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book e Reading Order use to select if the pages read from Left to Right or Right to Left Note The Reading Order option may not be displayed if it has not been enabled in Tools Refer to the Administration and Accounting guide for more information Select Save to save your selections and exit Several pages of a bound document can be copied using the Build Job
318. the same name exists Document Management The Document Management feature enables users to assign descriptive data to S Document Management a scanned job The descriptive data can be accessed by other software applications to assist in searching indexing and the automated processing of scanned documents Required Value The Document Management data requirements are individually defined and programed within the workflow scanning template The Document Management data fields can be either mandatory or optional If the data is mandatory the user is prompted to enter the data before scanning is allowed Once the required data is entered the user can commence scanning the job If the data is optional the user is prompted to enter the data but can complete the job without the data if required Add File Destinations This option allows you to select additional network locations as filing destinations for B Add File Destinations your scanned documents These additional SS S File Path filing destinations must be setup by the DEE System Administrator using Internet 5 Peer Services e Select the destination required from i TEN mes the list geg gt To view information about the destination select View Details The destination filing path and information is displayed ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 1 Workflow Scanning
319. these two exception pages and select the alternate paper size to use 1 To add Exceptions select the Add Exceptions button above the table ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 135 Print Special Pages 2 Enter the page number the exception programing applies to If multiple exceptions are required it is recommended you enter all the page numbers separated by a comma or enter a page range separated by a dash If individual programing is required for some of the exceptions the entry can be edited from the table 3 Select the Paper requirements for the exceptions If Use Job Setting is displayed the same paper as the main job is used 4 Select the 2 Sided Printing requirements for the exceptions Add Exceptions e Use Job Setting uses the same programing applied to the main la Enter page numbers and or page ranges J O b separate For example 1 3 5 12 e 1 Sided Print prints the exception pages on one side only St aper Blue C T e 2 Sided Print prints the exception pages on both sides of the sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound Ed E 2 Sided Printing along the long edge of the sheet O EEDE e 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints the exception pages on r WEE White Printer Default Type both sides of the sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound along the short edge of the sheet Job Settings displays the paper requirements specified for the main job 5 Sel
320. tion Information about the installed options on your device General Information the status of the paper trays and Customer Support Paper Tray e s http www xerox com SO consumables and fault information The serial number and device details are also SE provided along with usage information SE such as the number of impressions Machine Serial Number ES Options BRE123456N System Software Version Maintenance 061 180 100 18590 Assistant Service Code 3 256 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status Job Status Job Status The job lists can be accessed by pressing the Job Status button Information about current jobs and completed jobs is displayed Active Jobs This screen displays all the jobs currently in the list waiting to be processed Each job is identified with the following information Owner Name and Status The Active Jobs list displays up to 150 jobs e Select the Job Status button on the control panel Completed Jobs The Active Jobs list is displayed Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the jobs CVillone 4 JobStatus doc 3 Printing BTVu MachineStatus doc A Held Secure Print BTVu 4 JobStatus doc 8 Held Secure Print The most recently submitted job is displayed at the bottom of the list e The sequence of jobs can be altered by promoting or deleting jobs in the list Special doc A Held for Multiple Reasons 4 Special doc 4 Held Resources Required
321. tions available in Tools For information about the settings available in Internet Services refer to the System Administrator Guide These options should be setup and customized by the System Administrator Therefore access to the Tools options is passcode protected Entry to the Tools pathway is via the Machine Status button on the control panel Accessing Tools 1 Press the Machine Status button 2 Select the Tools tab Billing Information Device Settings To have access to all the Tools options Been o SE E you must be logged in as an Administrator a a EES User Name and Password as directed 7 The default user name and password E The Tools options are displayed Most Tools screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen 270 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings The Device Settings are used to customize options which are specific to the device such as Energy Saver and Paper Tray settings General Select the General option to access the following settings e Energy Saver on page 271 e Date amp Time on page 272 e Language Keyboard Selection
322. to Home Scan to Home allows you to scan hard copy originals at the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 and send them to a destination on the network which is specified as your Home destination You enter your Network Authentication log in at the device The device displays one Scan to Home template When you scan a document the authentication server provides the information as to who is logged in at the device The Workflow Scanning option needs to be installed before this feature can be used but it is NOT necessary for the Workflow Scanning repositories and templates to be configured Your System Administrator enables the Scan to Home option in Internet Services Your System Administrator also needs to enable Network Authentication for this feature to be available Lightweight Directory Application Protocol LDAP connectivity may also be used Using Scan to Home The Scan to Home option must be enabled and setup by the System Administrator in order for the Scan to Home template to be available on the device You must also be logged in on the device using Network Authentication to use this option 1 Load the original documents in the document feeder or on the document glass 2 Press the Clear All AC button twice and then Confirm to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Tolog in select the Log In Out button on the control panel ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 173 Workflow Scanning Scan to Home 4 Use the keyboa
323. ton Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information e If Xerox Standard Accounting is enabled the user will also have to log in using their Xerox Standard Accounting details Keyboardit If Network Accounting is enabled the user must enter a User ID and an Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display e Local User oo Account Name To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu EZH View Accounts Close A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel 196 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print From 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typogra
324. tory Report The report is sent to the job list and Options Report pri nted Pending Jobs Report e Select Close to return to the previous screen 294 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Job Sheets Select the Job Sheets option to access the ae lt E G Information following settings Device Settings e Banner Sheets on page 295 Job Sheets e Output Error Sheets on page 295 dee Network Settings Es Banner Sheets e Paper Type amp Color on page 295 Banner Sheets With this option the device can print a wy banner sheet with every print job If enabled you can still choose not to print the banner sheet from the printer driver for specific jobs e Enable is selected to print a banner sheet e Disable switches off the banner sheet option Output Error Sheets Enables the device to print an error report if an error occurs during a print job e Enable is selected to print an Output Error Sheet e Disable switches off the Output Error Sheet option Paper Type amp Color Allows you to select the type and color of S media used to print the Banner Error Scan Status and Fax Status sheets iai ATS e Select the required Paper Type and Paper Color Service Plan This option is used to change your Xerox Service Plan To change the plan contact the Xerox Support Center with your machine serial number Xero
325. trait ia tres S More lg 511 Reduce Enlarge dex Transparency 2 1 Sided Folding e 1 Staple Landscape the staple will ge be positioned in one of the long edge corners depending on how the originals are loaded Rotate Side 2 More e Folding a new window opens providing access to the folding options Refer to Folding on page 15 e Use More to access additional output options For information about the Staple options refer to Stapling Options on page 14 For information about Hole Punch options refer to Hole Punching on page 15 Stapling Options The stapling options available are dependent on the finishing device available and the configuration setup For information about the available finishing devices refer to Finishing Devices on page 17 cancer ls e 1 Staple when this option is selected a single staple is positioned in the top left corner of the output Com EI Copy Output e 2Staple when this option is selected C two staples are positioned parallel to the left or top edge of the copies Z i 1 Staple Staples 2 e Miulti Staple when this option is selected depending on the size of your copy paper either three or four staples will be positioned parallel to the left edge or your copies For example A 0 mW Iw gt as ee J Mult Staple e 4 Staples A4 LEF A3 8 5x11 LEF 11x17 8x10 LEF 14 ColorQube 9301 9302 93
326. transmit over the internet or intranet Recipients are selected from an address book or entered manually using the keyboard Received Internet Faxes are automatically sent from the server to the device as print jobs Most feature screens include these buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen Instructions for sending an internet fax and using the basic features are provided in ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 How to Sheets If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features refer to Log In Out on page 110 96 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Internet Fax Internet Fax These Internet Fax options provide access RER Layout Job Settings Adjustment Options Assembly to features which are required for programing basic internet fax jobs To Recipient pg access the Internet Fax options select Services Home and Internet Fax The s Internet Fax tab is displayed Subject rey Output Color 2 Sided Scanning Original Type Black amp White 1 Sided Photo amp Text New Recipient Use this option to en
327. troduction This guide describes the different types of media that can be used in your device the paper trays available and the types and sizes of media that can be loaded and fed from each tray It also identifies the orientation the media can be loaded Long Edge Feed LEF or Short Edge Feed SEF Paper Tray 1 This tray is standard on the device It is a fully adjustable tray and is used for media sizes 5 5x8 5 to 11x17 A5 to A3 The capacity for this tray is 550 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Paper Tray 2 This tray is standard on the device It is a fully adjustable tray and is used for media sizes 5 5x8 5 to 11x17 A5 to A3 The capacity for this tray is 550 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Paper Tray 3 This tray is standard on the device It is a dedicated tray and is set to a fixed size either A4 or 8 5x11 The capacity for this tray is 2100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Tray 4 Bypass This tray is also standard on the device and is used for non standard printing media It can be used for media sizes in the range A5 SEF to SRA3 SEF 5 5x8 5 SEF to 12x18 SEF The capacity for this tray is 100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Tray 5 An optional high capacity paper source which feeds A4 or 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed LEF media as standard Additional kits can be purchased to enable different paper sizes to be fed The capacity for this tray is 4000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper
328. tructions New Templates 1 To create a new template select the Scan option and select Create New re eas Template d Note A New Distribution Template General Information window is displayed 2 Enter the name that you want to eanan appear as the template name the ei Tergiste Name device SR Cen 3 Complete the Description and Owner fields if required 4 Select the Add button to create the template The new template name is added to the list on the left of the screen The new template is populated with the same settings as the Default template You can now modify the settings as required Fe Name Late Default Vaise ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 163 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Modifying a Template Existing templates can be modified using Internet Services 1 To modify a template select the Internet Services Scan option eene 2 Select the required template from the 1 list on the left of the screen The template settings are displayed Refer to Template Options on page 165 for information about the available settings 3 Select Edit to change the options Tea Piara Tue Detna required 4 Select Apply to save the selections and exit Copying a Template A template can be copied and used as a base for a new templat
329. tructions about power procedures If rebooting the device does not resolve the problem use the instructions contained in this guide to identify and solve the problem If you still cannot fix the problem contact the Xerox Support Center for advice Faults There are different categories of faults that can occur on your device and different ways in which they are identified depending on the type of fault occurring This section gives an overview of the different types of faults and the way that faults are displayed and recorded Your device has three fault types Hard Down faults User Clearable faults and Status Messages Within each fault type there are subgroups of fault categories relating to the effect the fault has on the device operation The fault display generated for each fault depends on the category of that fault Hard Down Faults Hard Down faults prevent a subsystem module or component from functioning properly There are three categories of Hard Down faults e Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem or module is unable to function correctly For example if during a stapler job a fault is detected other features are still functional but the stapler is unavailable e Failure Fault this is declared when a low level fault causes a major subsystem to function incorrectly For example a fault occurs with the cleaning unit causing the print and copy features to become non functioning e Fatal Fault this occurs when a system
330. ttings are stored and can be accessed using the Retrieve Saved Settings feature 44 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Copy p pe EBS Copy Image Quality See Output Format Job Assembly Build Job E Sample Job Save Current Settings ia Retrieve Saved Settings Save Current Settings Job Assembly Retrieve Saved Settings This feature enables you to Retrieve Saved Settings from the device memory and apply them to the current job Changes can be made to the retrieved settings but these will not be stored with the saved settings 1 Select the Retrieve Saved Settings button on the Job Assembly tab Output Format Job Assembly G Sample Job Save Current Settings aj Retrieve Saved Settings 2 Select the required job settings from the list If required use the scroll bar to access all the settings 3 Select the Load Settings button to retrieve the programing information E Retrieve Saved Settings The recalled programing features Setting Name become active YU To delete a Settings entry use the p Delete Settings option and select 5 Mark Job Delete to confirm Kaffie 4 Modify the selections as required for See this job These additional SES modifications are not saved with the saved settings 5 Load your originals and press the Start button ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 45 Copy Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has
331. ty text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for photos and graphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit 154 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are e Normal Quality produces small files by using advanced compression EE Quality File size techniques Image quality is ality Norma q 9 q y RITA ganes ships Gian acceptable but some quality Quality Quaity The Normal Quality option produces smaller files with good image quality A Small files are better for sharing a
332. u Multi Page TIFF Tagged Image File Format produces a single TIFF file containing several pages of scanned images A more specialized software is required to open this type of file format TIFF 1 File per Page produces a graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned JPEG 1 File per Page Joint Photographic Experts Group produces a compressed graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned Select Save to save your selections and exit If File Already Exists This option is used to determine how the device handles duplicate filenames 160 e If File Already Exists Add Number to Name adds a unique 2 Add Number to Name number to the filename used D 000 001 002 Add Date amp Time To Name appends ee a date and time stamp and a device Add to identifier to the filename oe Existing File Do Not Save ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Workflow Scanning Filing Options e Add to TIFF JPEG Folder creates a folder with the given name and stores a file for each page of your original Only available if TIFF or JPEG is the chosen file format e Overwrite Existing File overwrites the existing file with the new file e Do Not Save the scanned images are not saved if a file with
333. uality pictures Ee though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art er eles E Output Color A nin igi Scan Presets e Photo is used specifically for originals 11 mie containing photos magazine pictures or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Map is used if your original is a map or contains intricate line art and text e Newspaper Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text How the Original was Produced e Printed Original is for originals that have come from a magazine book or newspaper or that have been printed on a large printing device e Photocopied Original is for originals that are photocopies e Photograph is for high quality photographic originals e Inkjet Original is for originals that have been produced using an inkjet printer e Solid Ink Original is for originals produced by a solid ink printing process such as output from this device ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 151 Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Options Scan Presets Use Scan Presets to optimise scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents The options are e Sharing amp Printing is used for sharing files that are going to be viewed on screen and for printing most standard
334. uality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics 200 x 100 dpi D EI 150 dpi e 200x100 dpi recommended for good quality text documents and line art e 200 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Suitable for office documents and photographs e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for photos and graphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit 102 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Fax Advanced Settings Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are e Normal Quality produces small files by using advanced compression E Quality File Size
335. unter 4 S when a listed supply 5 replaced amp Supply Counter Reset Supply Pages Remaining e Select the supply and then select EC Reset Counter SE Remaining Select Reset to CO nfirm Estimated Pages Remaining Reset Counter ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 281 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Quick Setup Home This option is used to quickly setup your device with the key information required in order to start using the features and Feature functions IP Address Settings Configured 2 lt Quick Setup Home Contact Numbers 41 Not Configured Select the Quick Setup Home option to access the following settings e IP Address Settings on page 282 e Contact Numbers on page 283 IP Address Settings Use to enter the IP Address Settings for the system There are several screens for entering the IP Address information select s fis vs is the new standard protocol forthe the Next option to view further screens E PE iise select Enabled For both Eo and Iv gt Note IPv4 is used to select IPv4 protocol v a e corses Making changes to the IPv6 feature will result in Select Enabled to activate this setting ee eo eer IP Address Settings a reboot of the Network Controller window is closed e IPv6 is the new standard protocol for the internet If you are unsure which IP setting to use select Enabled for both IPv4 and IPv6 e Select Next to c
336. up the optional services available on the device To enable a service enter the Authorisation Code Activation Code Required The registration procedure for your supplies plan has not been completed provided with the option and select Enter Activation Code You are currently in a Courtesy Print period and have prints remaining Once a service has been enabled it may p Activation Code require configuring using Internet Services provided by Xerox For further instructions refer to the System The Activation Code can be acquired by calling the Xerox Support Center Please TT S provide your Machine s serial number when calling Administration Guide Machine Serial Number BRE123456N Note Some services will require a Reboot to activate them on the device Low Supply Warning This option is used to set up the warning period given for each of the device consumables The device will display a Supply This feature sets when the Status T Region will display a low warnin message showing the specified number of S OD Kee days before the consumable reaches the S eaning Unit 47 By setting a value to 0 the user end of its life Set the notification period a E wl get NO WARNING for the following consumables 5 e ColorQube Ink Sticks e Cleaning Unit e Document Feeder Feed Roller If 0 is set no warning will be provided Supply Counter Reset This option is used to reset the co
337. upplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children A WARNING Do not use pressurised air spray cleaning aids on or in this equipment Some pressurised air spray containers contain explosive mixtures and are not suitable for use in electrical applications Use of such cleaners can result in a risk of explosion and fire Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass e Apply Xerox Cleaning Fluid or Xerox Anti Static Cleaner to a lint free cloth Liquid should never be poured directly onto the glass e Wipe clean the entire glass area e Wipe away any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel Note Spots or marks on the glass will be reproduced on the prints when copying from the document glass Spots on the Constant Velocity Transport glass the strip of glass on the left will show up as streaks on the prints when copying from the document handler Touch Screen e Usea soft lint free cloth lightly dampened with water e Wipe clean the entire area including the Touch Screen e Remove any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel 314 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Defining the Problem This section contains problem solving procedures to help you locate and resolve a problem Some problems can be resolved by rebooting your device Refer to Power Options on page 308 for ins
338. ved All Usage Counters displays the total impressions the device has made Update is used to update the display for the latest counter figures Tools Tools provides access to the administrative Jm nn 3 and maintenance tools for the device General users are not permitted to view or i Billing Device Settings Troubleshooting alter certain options Bl 2 Display Brightness Note Information about the Tools option is provided in the Administration and Accounting guide and the System Administrator Guide Contact your System Administrator for more details ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 265 Machine and Job Status Machine Status 266 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Machine and Job Status Version 1 0 09 10 Xerox Xerox ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting 2010 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX XEROX and Design and ColorQube are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 1 0 September 2010 Contents 270 PCCOSSING TOONS EE 270 Device SeN S 22 20 2000 E A A E E EEEE a 271
339. ver for the job Xerox System PPD Files A PostScript Printer Description PPD file is a readable text file that provides a uniform approach to specifying special features for printer drivers that interpret PostScript Xerox provides PostScript PPDs for use with generic Windows XP Server 2003 Vista PostScript printer drivers These PPDs are available on the disc provided with your device or from the Xerox Web site Control Options There are a number of options which appear on all of the printer driver screens e OK Saves all the new settings and closes the driver or dialog These new settings remain in effect until changed or until the software application is closed and the printer driver options revert to the default settings e Cancel Closes the dialog and returns all settings in the tabs to the values that were in place before the dialog was opened Any changes made are lost e Help The Printer Driver Help system is the primary source for information about using the printer drivers You can access the Help system through the Help buttons in the driver Included in the Help system are feature descriptions step by step procedures Xerox system information problem solving information and support information e Defaults Resets the current tab and all its settings to the system default values The action of this button applies only to the current tab All other tabs remain unchanged e Earth Smart Settings e Set 2 Sided Print a
340. vice touch screen that is the as language that is displayed when the Languages Keyboards device is switched on You can also select English United States US Standard the keyboard to display when a text entry Wen S eion is required _ _ e Languages is used to select the Deutsch aerz required language using the scroll bar H rn aen e Keyboard is used to select the A appropriate keyboard layout for the selected language 272 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Custom Keyboard Button Use this option to enter frequently used text which you would like to appear in the keyboard P Custom Keyboard Button Text xerox com e Enter the text required using the keyboard Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character or use Clear Text to delete the entire entry Xerox Customer Support Use to enter the Xerox Customer Support telephone number This number is displayed on the touch screen and is accessed via the Machine Status button e Enter the appropriate telephone number using the keyboard Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect entry or the Clear Text button to clear the entire entry Entry Screen Defaults This feature can only be set using Internet Services It enables the System Administrator to set which screen the user sees first on the device Instructions for accessing the feature are displayed on the screen when the opti
341. w xerox com Instructions for installing the ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 and print drivers are provided in the System Administrator Guide Print Drivers For Windows users there are several drivers Your System Administrator may have loaded specific drivers on your PC However if the choice of driver is yours the following information will help you decide which driver is most suited to your workstation The printer drivers are available in PostScript PCL 5 PCL 6 and XPS printing formats e PostScript gives you greater ability to scale and manipulate images it offers more precision with high end graphics PostScript also provides you with different types of error handling and font substitution options e PCL Printer Command Language generally has fewer advanced features than PostScript However using PCL enables you to process most jobs faster e XPS XML Paper Specification is an open specification for a page description language and a fixed document format originally developed by Microsoft 126 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Introduction Once you have decided upon the most appropriate print driver install it on your workstation in the usual way If you do not know how to install drivers refer to the System Administrator Guide or consult your System Administrator Note You can load more than one print driver for the device on your workstation Then when you send a job to print you can choose the most appropriate print dri
342. wide failure exists that is unrecoverable For example a power fault occurs causing the device to be inoperable Customer Clearable Faults A Customer Clearable fault is a fault that can be cleared by the user There are three categories of Customer Clearable faults e Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem has detected a customer clearable fault for example when a stapler runs out of staples The print and copy features are still operable but the stapler function is not e Failure Fault this is declared when a Low Level Fault causes a major subsystem to become unavailable For example when a paper misfeed is detected the print and copy functions are made inoperable until the paper is cleared by the user ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 315 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting e Reset Fault this can be cleared by powering the device off then on again Status Messages Status Messages are informal messages that do not impact the device from functioning properly There are two categories of Status Messages e Warning Messages are informational and usually have to do with replacing consumables The messages warn the local user of impending problems or actions that need to be taken to avoid a fault occurring For example if the Cleaning Unit is close to the end of its life the device displays a warning message that the unit needs to be replaced soon At this time the system sets a pre defined limit until a Customer C
343. x will provide you with a Service Plan Authorization Number Enter the number and select the Change Service Plan button ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 295 Administration and Accounting Network Settings Network Settings mene Fa Information SD Supplies e A Em These settings are used to enter the network parameters for the system This section provides an overview of the Device Settings e 26 TCP IP Settings Detailed instructions for network Network Settings installation are provided in the System Administrator Guide ak Advanced Settings Accounting Settings 2s Network Logs iii O li n e Offli ne Troubleshooting Use to disconnect the device from the network temporarily Selecting Offline disconnects the device from all networks Any job entering the system is held Any current outgoing jobs are not completed while the system is offline Select Online to reconnect the device to the network TCP IP Settings This option enables the System Administrator to enter the TCP IP settings for the device Advanced Settings This option enables the System Administrator to setup the Network Settings A warning screen is displayed prior to accessing these settings as a Network Controller reset is required after the settings are changed These settings must only be accessed and entered or changed by the System Administrator Network Logs Only use this option if instructed to do so by the Xerox Suppo
344. xcessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local Telephone Company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ T XX XX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 339 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations To order the correct service from the local telephone company you may also have to quote the codes listed below e Facility Interface Code FIC 2 e Service Order Code SOC 9 0Y A WARNING Ask your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on your line Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can damage telephone company equipment You not Xerox assume all responsibility and or liability for any damage caused by the connection of this machine to an unauthorized jack If this Xerox equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as possib
345. y Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network Select Save to save your selections and exit 188 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 E mail Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you Leg E as to manipulate the scanned image and eg enhance the appearance and style of your output To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and E mail Then select the Layout Adjustment tab D Original Orientation O Original Size Edge Erase Upright Images Auto Detect All Edges 0 20 Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The options are e Upright Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the k Original Orientation document feeder Use this option if upright mages and Sideways Images refer to e e direction the images are loaded in the your images are in the orientation Upright images matching the image shown when SE Sideways Images selections you can load the originals either upright or sideways and the device will rotate it appropriately loaded in the document feeder oe Portrait Originals you are using the Document Glass the orientation is as seen before turning it over e Sideways Images refers to the direction the images are loaded in the ii document feeder Use this option if your images are in the orientation matching the image
346. y output 2 sided e Select the default required for each feature in each of the programing tabs e Select Save Defaults The settings selected become the default settings for each copy job e Aconfirmation screen is displayed Device Settings Service Settings ee WW Machine Billi a ro E illing Information Fauits Supplies Information Features Service Settings T SOA GEES Billing Faults Supplies Machine Information Device Settings Service Settings Network Settings Accounting Settings Security Settings SS Reduce Enlarge Presets Troubleshooting Copy Service Settings Features Es Feature Defaults E A Image Shift Presets Reading Order Options Va N Copy Service Settings een Ven e Copy Image Quality Layout Adjustment Output Options 2 Sided Copying Copy Output Collated 1 Staple Portrait 1 Staple EN E Output Color Paper Supply EN Auto Select g 1E 4 Plain Auto Detect 1 1 Sided 1 2 Sided Black amp White 211x17 EI Jaen g 35 8 5x11 Transparency EN More 2 2 Sided Reduce Enlarge More 2 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 select Done to return to the previous screen ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 285 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Edge Erase Presets Enables you to setup the Edge Erase pre set entries There are 2 pre named preset
347. ye cover with the same settings on the same media 2 Select the Cover Options required e Front Only provides a front cover e Back Only provides a back cover e Front and Back Different provides a front and back cover with individual programing requirements and on different media if required 3 Select the Paper Settings for the selected cover options 134 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Print Special Pages 4 Select the printing options e Blank or Preprinted inserts a blank or pre printed sheet and does not print an image e Print on Side 1 prints on side one of the cover e Print on Side 2 prints on side two of the cover only e Print on Both Sides prints on both sides of the cover 5 Select OK to save your selections and exit The cover details display in the table Add Inserts Use this option to add blank or pre printed inserts to your printed document To program the inserts you enter the page number of the page before the insert If an insert is required as your first page Before Page 1 can be specified It is recommended that you work through your document and identify the page numbers where inserts are required prior to programing This option is also used if tabs are required in the job Refer to the Paper and Media guide for further information about tabs 1 add an insert select the Add Inserts button above the table een 2 Using the Inserts Options drop down menu select whether the insert is ui in
348. you to do so Ink Sticks Ink sticks are added to 4 receptacles in the ink loader through an access door on the top of the device The shape of each ink stick is unique for each color to prevent inks sticks being loaded into the incorrect receptacles Ink can be added to the ink loader at any time if there is enough room to accommodate the new stick 310 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Each ink loader has an ink low sensor which is activated when approximately 2 usable ink sticks remain The device will stop printing when the ink loader has about one third of an ink stick remaining in any color A message notifies you when it is time to order ink if the ink is low and when the ink has run out A ink loader cover sensor detects when the ink cover is opened the touch screen displays the status of the ink sticks Cleaning Unit The Cleaning Unit applies a silicone oil release agent to the print drum A WARNING SILICON FLUIDS ARE AN EXTREME SLIP HAZARD In the event of accidental spillage onto floors covered with any surface including carpeting immediately provide a slip hazard warning and cordon off the area Do not walk in the contaminated area and avoid any risk of coating the surface of footwear Do not attempt to mop up the spill with conventional mops and water This will spread the contamination and may extend the slip hazard outside the immediate contaminated area Large spills on n
349. zaas copy or delete Workflow Scanning templates Refer to the Workflow Scanning guide for more information about the Scan options Docume Management Fields Optional Feia Name Field Label Defaut Value ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 229 Internet Services Address Book Address Book The device supports two types of address book e Internal A global address book provided by LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol services e Public An address book created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV file Comma Separated Values format The Address Book tab is used to setup and FH am Ack BR Public Address Book Trei manage a Public Address Book The file must be in a CSV Comma Separated Values format for the device to be able to zos read the file contents The device can have access to both an LDAP server and a Public Address Book If both are configured the user will be presented with the choice to use either address book to select e mail recipients ndy Kame 0 F masd Refer to the System Administrator Guide for further information about Address Books 230 ColorQube 9301 9302 9303 Internet Services Properties Properties The Properties option contains all the settings setups and default values for installing and setting up the device These are protected by a user name and Des password and should only be changed by G snc esc EE E Prir

Xerox ColorQube 9303_U multifunctional

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents